WO2020259632A1 - Control method for set top box, system, and related device - Google Patents

Control method for set top box, system, and related device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2020259632A1
WO2020259632A1 PCT/CN2020/098280 CN2020098280W WO2020259632A1 WO 2020259632 A1 WO2020259632 A1 WO 2020259632A1 CN 2020098280 W CN2020098280 W CN 2020098280W WO 2020259632 A1 WO2020259632 A1 WO 2020259632A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
infrared
channel
television
top box
infrared code
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2020/098280
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
胡建荣
黎亮齐
沈晓东
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2020259632A1 publication Critical patent/WO2020259632A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/40Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/41Structure of client; Structure of client peripherals
    • H04N21/422Input-only peripherals, i.e. input devices connected to specially adapted client devices, e.g. global positioning system [GPS]
    • H04N21/42204User interfaces specially adapted for controlling a client device through a remote control device; Remote control devices therefor
    • H04N21/42206User interfaces specially adapted for controlling a client device through a remote control device; Remote control devices therefor characterized by hardware details
    • H04N21/42221Transmission circuitry, e.g. infrared [IR] or radio frequency [RF]
    • GPHYSICS
    • G08SIGNALLING
    • G08CTRANSMISSION SYSTEMS FOR MEASURED VALUES, CONTROL OR SIMILAR SIGNALS
    • G08C23/00Non-electrical signal transmission systems, e.g. optical systems
    • G08C23/04Non-electrical signal transmission systems, e.g. optical systems using light waves, e.g. infrared
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/40Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/43Processing of content or additional data, e.g. demultiplexing additional data from a digital video stream; Elementary client operations, e.g. monitoring of home network or synchronising decoder's clock; Client middleware
    • H04N21/436Interfacing a local distribution network, e.g. communicating with another STB or one or more peripheral devices inside the home
    • H04N21/4363Adapting the video or multiplex stream to a specific local network, e.g. a IEEE 1394 or Bluetooth® network
    • H04N21/43632Adapting the video or multiplex stream to a specific local network, e.g. a IEEE 1394 or Bluetooth® network involving a wired protocol, e.g. IEEE 1394
    • H04N21/43635HDMI
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/40Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/43Processing of content or additional data, e.g. demultiplexing additional data from a digital video stream; Elementary client operations, e.g. monitoring of home network or synchronising decoder's clock; Client middleware
    • H04N21/436Interfacing a local distribution network, e.g. communicating with another STB or one or more peripheral devices inside the home
    • H04N21/4363Adapting the video or multiplex stream to a specific local network, e.g. a IEEE 1394 or Bluetooth® network
    • H04N21/43637Adapting the video or multiplex stream to a specific local network, e.g. a IEEE 1394 or Bluetooth® network involving a wireless protocol, e.g. Bluetooth, RF or wireless LAN [IEEE 802.11]
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/40Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/43Processing of content or additional data, e.g. demultiplexing additional data from a digital video stream; Elementary client operations, e.g. monitoring of home network or synchronising decoder's clock; Client middleware
    • H04N21/438Interfacing the downstream path of the transmission network originating from a server, e.g. retrieving MPEG packets from an IP network
    • H04N21/4383Accessing a communication channel

Definitions

  • This application relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular to a control method, system and related devices of a set-top box.
  • STB set top box
  • the TV remote control When a user needs to watch a live program of a set-top box, he needs to use the TV remote control to enter the signal source selection interface of the TV and select the corresponding set-top box device. After selecting the set-top box device as the signal source, the user needs to use the set-top box remote control to control the set-top box to complete operations such as channel switching of live programs through infrared remote control signals. In this way, the television and the set-top box are respectively controlled by two remote controllers, and the operation process is complicated.
  • the present application provides a control method, system and related device for a set-top box, which can realize that the user can control the TV and the set-top box at the same time only through the TV remote control, thereby reducing the operation steps of the user.
  • the present application provides a method for controlling a set-top box, including: first, the remote controller sends a first control instruction to the television in response to a user's selection operation on the first channel. Then, after receiving the first control instruction, the television sends the first infrared code corresponding to the first channel to the infrared control device. Then, after receiving the first infrared code, the infrared control device sends the first infrared code to the set-top box via infrared. Then, after receiving the first infrared code, the set-top box obtains the video data of the first channel, and sends the video data of the first channel to the television. Finally, the TV plays the video data of the first channel.
  • the television when the television receives an operation instruction input by the user for the set-top box through the remote control, the television can send the infrared code corresponding to the operation instruction to the infrared control device, and the infrared control device is receiving After reaching the infrared code, the infrared control signal corresponding to the operation instruction can be sent to the set-top box. After receiving the infrared control signal, the set-top box can execute the operation instruction. In this way, it can be realized that the user only needs to input operation instructions on a single remote control to complete the control of the set-top box and the TV.
  • the method before the remote controller sends the first control instruction to the television in response to the user's selection operation of the first channel, the method further includes: when the television and the set-top box are in standby at the same time, the remote control In response to the user's power-on operation of the TV, the device sends a second control instruction to the TV to instruct the TV and the set-top box to switch to the power-on state. Then, after the television receives the second control instruction, it switches to the power-on state and sends the second infrared code corresponding to the second control instruction to the infrared control device.
  • the infrared control device sends the second infrared code to the set-top box via infrared.
  • the set-top box switches to the power-on state. In this way, the user can remotely control the TV and the set-top box to turn on at the same time with only one remote control, which simplifies the user's operation.
  • the method further includes: first, when the TV and the set-top box are in the on state at the same time, the remote control sends a third control instruction to the TV in response to the user's standby operation on the TV. Instruct the TV and set-top box to switch to standby. Then, after the television receives the third control instruction, it switches to the standby state and sends the third infrared code corresponding to the third control instruction to the infrared control device. Next, after receiving the third infrared code, the infrared control device sends the third infrared code to the set-top box via infrared. Finally, after receiving the third infrared code, the set-top box switches to the standby state. In this way, the user only needs to use one remote control to control the TV and the set-top box in standby at the same time, which simplifies the user's operation.
  • the method further includes: firstly, when the TV is playing the video data of the first channel, the remote control sends a fourth control instruction to the TV in response to the user's operation of switching to the second channel . Then, after receiving the fourth control instruction, the television determines the fourth infrared code corresponding to the channel number of the second channel, and sends the fourth infrared code to the infrared control device. Then, after receiving the fourth infrared code, the infrared control device sends the fourth infrared code to the set-top box via infrared. Then, after receiving the fourth infrared code, the set-top box obtains the video data of the second channel, and sends the video data of the second channel to the television.
  • the TV plays the video data of the second channel.
  • the user can remotely control the set-top box through the remote control connected with the TV to cut the station, realize that a remote control can control the TV and the set-top box at the same time, simplifying the user's operation.
  • the method further includes: firstly, when the TV is playing the video data of the first channel, the remote control sends a fourth control instruction to the TV in response to the user's operation of switching to the second channel . Then, after receiving the fourth control instruction, the television sends the fifth infrared code corresponding to the fourth control instruction to the infrared control device. Then, after receiving the fifth infrared code, the infrared control device sends the fifth infrared code to the set-top box via infrared. Then, after receiving the fifth infrared code, the set-top box determines the channel number of the second channel according to the fifth infrared code and the channel number of the first channel.
  • the set-top box obtains the video data of the second channel according to the channel number of the second channel, and sends the video data of the second channel to the TV. Finally, the TV plays the video data of the second channel.
  • the user can remotely control the set-top box through the remote control connected with the TV to cut the station, realize that a remote control can control the TV and the set-top box at the same time, simplifying the user's operation.
  • the present application provides another set-top box control method, including: first, the remote controller sends a first control instruction to the television in response to a user's selection operation of the first channel. Then, after receiving the first control instruction, the television sends the first infrared code corresponding to the first channel to the infrared control device. Then, after receiving the first infrared code, the infrared control device sends the first infrared code to the set-top box via infrared. Wherein, the first infrared code is used to instruct the set-top box to obtain the video data of the first channel, and send the video data of the first channel to the television. Finally, the television plays the video data of the first channel.
  • the television when the television receives an operation instruction input by the user for the set-top box through the remote control, the television can send the infrared code corresponding to the operation instruction to the infrared control device, and the infrared control device is receiving After reaching the infrared code, the infrared control signal corresponding to the operation instruction can be sent to the set-top box. After receiving the infrared control signal, the set-top box can execute the operation instruction. In this way, it can be realized that the user only needs to input operation instructions on a single remote control to complete the control of the set-top box and the TV.
  • the method before the remote controller sends the first control instruction to the TV in response to the user's selection operation of the first channel, the method further includes: first, when the TV and the set-top box are in a standby state at the same time , The remote control sends a second control instruction to the television in response to the user's power-on operation of the television, for instructing the television and the set-top box to switch to the on state. Then, after the television receives the second control instruction, it switches to the power-on state and sends the second infrared code corresponding to the second control instruction to the infrared control device.
  • the infrared control device sends the second infrared code to the set-top box via infrared.
  • the second infrared code is used to instruct the set-top box to turn on. In this way, the user can remotely control the TV and the set-top box to turn on at the same time with only one remote control, which simplifies the user's operation.
  • the method further includes: first, when the TV and the set-top box are in the on state at the same time, the remote control sends a third control instruction to the TV in response to the user's standby operation on the TV. Instruct the TV and set-top box to switch to standby. Then, after the television receives the third control instruction, it switches to the standby state and sends the third infrared code corresponding to the third control instruction to the infrared control device. Next, after receiving the third infrared code, the infrared control device sends the third infrared code to the set-top box via infrared. Among them, the third infrared code is used to instruct the set-top box to switch to the standby state. In this way, the user only needs to use one remote control to control the TV and the set-top box in standby at the same time, which simplifies the user's operation.
  • the method further includes: firstly, when the television is playing the video data of the first channel, the remote control sends a fourth control to the television in response to the user's operation of switching to the second channel. instruction. Then, after receiving the fourth control instruction, the television determines the fourth infrared code corresponding to the channel number of the second channel, and sends the fourth infrared code to the infrared control device through the second transmission mode. Then, after receiving the fourth infrared code, the infrared control device sends the fourth infrared code to the set-top box via infrared.
  • the fourth infrared code is used to instruct the set-top box to obtain the video data of the second channel and send the video data of the second channel to the TV. Finally, the TV plays the video data of the second channel.
  • the user can remotely control the set-top box through the remote control connected with the TV to cut the station, realize that a remote control can control the TV and the set-top box at the same time, simplifying the user's operation.
  • the method further includes: firstly, when the television is playing the video data of the first channel, the remote control sends a fourth control to the television in response to the user's operation of switching to the second channel. instruction. Then, after receiving the fourth control instruction, the television sends the fifth infrared code corresponding to the fourth control instruction to the infrared control device. Then, after receiving the fifth infrared code, the infrared control device sends the fifth infrared code to the set-top box via infrared.
  • the fifth infrared code is used to instruct the set-top box to determine the channel number of the second channel according to the fifth infrared code and the channel number of the first channel, and obtain the video data of the second channel according to the channel number of the second channel , And send it to the TV. Finally, the TV plays the video data of the second channel.
  • the user can remotely control the set-top box through the remote control connected with the TV to cut the station, realize that a remote control can control the TV and the set-top box at the same time, simplifying the user's operation.
  • the present application provides a method for controlling a set-top box, including: first, the television receives a first control instruction sent by a remote controller in response to a selection operation for a first channel. Then, the TV sends the first infrared code corresponding to the first channel to the infrared control device. Then, after receiving the first infrared code, the infrared control device sends the first infrared code to the set-top box via infrared. The first infrared code is used to instruct the set-top box to obtain the video data of the first channel and send the video data of the first channel to the TV for playing.
  • the television when the television receives an operation instruction input by the user for the set-top box through the remote control, the television can send the infrared code corresponding to the operation instruction to the infrared control device, and the infrared control device is receiving After reaching the infrared code, the infrared control signal corresponding to the operation instruction can be sent to the set-top box. After receiving the infrared control signal, the set-top box can execute the operation instruction. In this way, it can be realized that the user only needs to input operation instructions on a single remote control to complete the control of the set-top box and the TV.
  • the method before the television receives the first control instruction sent by the remote controller in response to the selection operation of the first channel, the method further includes: first, when the television and the set-top box are in a standby state at the same time
  • the second control instruction is used to instruct the TV and the set-top box to switch to the power-on state.
  • the television is turned on and sends the second infrared code corresponding to the second control instruction to the infrared control device.
  • the infrared control device after receiving the second infrared code, the infrared control device sends the second infrared code to the set-top box via infrared.
  • the first infrared code is used to instruct the set-top box to turn on. In this way, the user can remotely control the TV and the set-top box to turn on at the same time with only one remote control, which simplifies the user's operation.
  • the method further includes: first, when the television and the set-top box are both in the on state, the television receives the third control instruction sent by the remote controller in response to the standby operation of the television for Instruct the TV and set-top box to switch to standby. Then, the television is switched to the standby state and sends the third infrared code corresponding to the third control instruction to the infrared control device. Finally, after receiving the third infrared code, the infrared control device sends the third infrared code to the set-top box via infrared. Among them, the third infrared code is used to instruct the set-top box to switch to the standby state. In this way, the user only needs to use one remote control to control the TV and the set-top box in standby at the same time, which simplifies the user's operation.
  • the method further includes: first, when the television plays the video data of the first channel, the television receives a fourth control instruction sent by the remote controller in response to the operation of switching to the second channel . Then, the television determines the fourth infrared code corresponding to the channel number of the second channel, and sends the fourth infrared code to the infrared control device. Then, after receiving the fourth infrared code, the infrared control device sends the fourth infrared code to the set-top box via infrared. Among them, the fourth infrared code is used to instruct the set-top box to obtain the video data of the second channel, and send the video data of the second channel to the TV for playing. In this way, the user can remotely control the set-top box through the remote control connected with the TV to cut the station, realize that a remote control can control the TV and the set-top box at the same time, simplifying the user's operation.
  • the method further includes: first, when the television plays the video data of the first channel, the television receives a fourth control instruction sent by the remote controller in response to the operation of switching to the second channel . Then, after receiving the fourth control instruction, the television sends the fifth infrared code corresponding to the fourth control instruction to the infrared control device. Then, after receiving the fifth infrared code, the infrared control device sends the fifth infrared code to the set-top box via infrared.
  • the fifth infrared code is used to instruct the set-top box to determine the channel number of the second channel according to the fifth infrared code and the channel number of the first channel, and obtain the video data of the second channel according to the channel number of the second channel, and Send it to the TV for playback.
  • the user can remotely control the set-top box through the remote control connected to the TV to cut the station, realize that a remote control can control the TV and the set-top box at the same time, which simplifies the user's operation.
  • this application provides a system, which includes: a remote control, a television, an infrared control device, and a set-top box.
  • the remote control is used to send a first control instruction to the television in response to the user's selection operation on the first channel.
  • the television is used for sending the first infrared code corresponding to the first channel to the infrared control device after receiving the first control instruction.
  • the infrared control device is used to send the first infrared code to the set-top box via infrared after receiving the first infrared code.
  • the set-top box is used to obtain the video data of the first channel after receiving the first infrared code, and send the video data of the first channel to the TV.
  • the TV set is used to play the video data of the first channel.
  • the TV when the TV receives an operation instruction input by the user for the set-top box through the remote control, the TV can send the infrared code corresponding to the operation instruction to the infrared control device, and the infrared control device receives the infrared After the code, the infrared control signal corresponding to the operation instruction can be sent to the set-top box. After receiving the infrared control signal, the set-top box can execute the operation instruction. In this way, it can be realized that the user only needs to input operation instructions on a single remote control to complete the control of the set-top box and the TV.
  • the remote control before the remote control sends the first control instruction to the TV in response to the user's selection operation of the first channel, when the TV and the set-top box are in standby at the same time: the remote control is also used for In response to the user's power-on operation of the TV, a second control instruction is sent to the TV.
  • the second control instruction is used to instruct the television and the set-top box to switch to the on state.
  • the television is also used to switch to the on state after receiving the second control instruction and send the second infrared code corresponding to the second control instruction to the infrared control device.
  • the infrared control device is also used to send the second infrared code to the set-top box via infrared after receiving the second infrared code.
  • the set-top box is also used to switch to the power-on state after receiving the second infrared code. In this way, the user can remotely control the TV and the set-top box to turn on at the same time with only one remote control, which simplifies the user's operation.
  • the remote control is also used to send a third control instruction to the TV in response to the user's standby operation on the TV, for instructing the TV And the set-top box switches to standby.
  • the television is also used to switch to the standby state after receiving the third control instruction and send the third infrared code corresponding to the third control instruction to the infrared control device.
  • the infrared control device is also used to send the third infrared code to the set-top box via infrared after receiving the third infrared code.
  • the set-top box is also used to switch to the standby state after receiving the third infrared code.
  • the remote control when the TV plays the video data of the first channel, the remote control is also used to send a fourth control instruction to the TV in response to the user's operation of switching to the second channel.
  • the television is also used to determine the fourth infrared code corresponding to the channel number of the second channel after receiving the fourth control instruction, and send the fourth infrared code to the infrared control device.
  • the infrared control device is also used to send the fourth infrared code to the set-top box via infrared after receiving the fourth infrared code.
  • the set-top box is also used to obtain the video data of the second channel after receiving the fourth infrared code, and send the video data of the second channel to the TV.
  • the TV is also used to play the video data of the second channel.
  • the user can remotely control the set-top box through the remote control connected to the TV to cut the station, realize that a remote control can control the TV and the set-top box at the same time, which simplifies the user's operation.
  • the method further includes: when the TV is playing the video data of the first channel, the remote control is also used to send the fourth channel to the TV in response to the user's operation of switching to the second channel. Control instruction.
  • the television is also used to send the fifth infrared code corresponding to the fourth control instruction to the infrared control device after receiving the fourth control instruction.
  • the infrared control device is also used to send the fifth infrared code to the set-top box via infrared after receiving the fifth infrared code.
  • the set-top box is further configured to determine the channel number of the second channel according to the fifth infrared code and the channel number of the first channel after receiving the fifth infrared code.
  • the set-top box is also used to obtain the video data of the second channel according to the channel number of the second channel, and send the video data of the second channel to the TV.
  • the TV is also used to play the video data of the second channel.
  • the present application provides a system, which includes a remote control, a television, and an infrared control device.
  • the remote control is used to send a first control instruction to the television in response to the user's selection operation on the first channel.
  • the television is used for sending the first infrared code corresponding to the first channel to the infrared control device after receiving the first control instruction.
  • the infrared control device is used to send the first infrared code to the set-top box via infrared after receiving the first infrared code.
  • the first infrared code is used to instruct the set-top box to obtain the video data of the first channel, and send the video data of the first channel to the television.
  • the TV set is used to play the video data of the first channel.
  • the TV when the TV receives an operation instruction input by the user for the set-top box through the remote control, the TV can send the infrared code corresponding to the operation instruction to the infrared control device, and the infrared control device receives the infrared After the code, the infrared control signal corresponding to the operation instruction can be sent to the set-top box. After receiving the infrared control signal, the set-top box can execute the operation instruction. In this way, it can be realized that the user only needs to input operation instructions on a single remote control to complete the control of the set-top box and the TV.
  • the remote control before the remote control sends the first control instruction to the TV in response to the user's selection operation of the first channel, when the TV and the set-top box are in standby at the same time: the remote control is also used for In response to the user's power-on operation of the TV, a second control instruction is sent to the TV.
  • the second control instruction is used to instruct the television and the set-top box to switch to the on state.
  • the television is also used to switch to the on state after receiving the second control instruction and send the second infrared code corresponding to the second control instruction to the infrared control device.
  • the infrared control device is also used to send the second infrared code to the set-top box via infrared after receiving the second infrared code.
  • the second infrared code is used to instruct the set-top box to switch to the on state.
  • the user can remotely control the TV and the set-top box to turn on at the same time with only one remote control, which simplifies the user's operation.
  • the remote control is also used to send a third control instruction to the TV in response to the user's standby operation on the TV, for instructing the TV And the set-top box switches to standby.
  • the television is also used to switch to the standby state after receiving the third control instruction and send the third infrared code corresponding to the third control instruction to the infrared control device.
  • the infrared control device is also used to send the third infrared code to the set-top box via infrared after receiving the third infrared code.
  • the third infrared code is used to instruct the set-top box to switch to the standby state. In this way, the user only needs to use one remote control to control the TV and the set-top box in standby at the same time, which simplifies the user's operation.
  • the remote control when the TV plays the video data of the first channel, the remote control is also used to send a fourth control instruction to the TV in response to the user's operation of switching to the second channel.
  • the television is also used to determine the fourth infrared code corresponding to the channel number of the second channel after receiving the fourth control instruction, and send the fourth infrared code to the infrared control device.
  • the infrared control device is also used to send the fourth infrared code to the set-top box via infrared after receiving the fourth infrared code.
  • the fourth infrared code is used to instruct the set-top box to obtain the video data of the second channel and send the video data of the second channel to the TV.
  • the TV is also used to play the video data of the second channel.
  • the user can remotely control the set-top box through the remote control connected with the TV to cut the station, realize that a remote control can control the TV and the set-top box at the same time, simplifying the user's operation.
  • the method further includes: when the TV is playing the video data of the first channel, the remote control is also used to send the fourth channel to the TV in response to the user's operation of switching to the second channel. Control instruction.
  • the television is also used to send the fifth infrared code corresponding to the fourth control instruction to the infrared control device after receiving the fourth control instruction.
  • the infrared control device is also used to send the fifth infrared code to the set-top box via infrared after receiving the fifth infrared code.
  • the fifth infrared code is used to instruct the set-top box to determine the channel number of the second channel based on the fifth infrared code and the channel number of the first channel, and then obtain the video data of the second channel according to the channel number of the second channel , And send the video data of the second channel to the TV.
  • the TV is also used to play the video data of the second channel.
  • the present application provides a system, which includes a TV set and infrared control equipment.
  • the television is used to receive the first control instruction sent by the remote controller in response to the selection operation for the first channel.
  • the television is also used to send the first infrared code corresponding to the first channel to the infrared control device.
  • the infrared control device is used to send the first infrared code to the set-top box via infrared after receiving the first infrared code.
  • the first infrared code is used to instruct the set-top box to obtain the video data of the first channel, and send the video data of the first channel to the TV for playing.
  • the TV when the TV receives an operation instruction input by the user for the set-top box through the remote control, the TV can send the infrared code corresponding to the operation instruction to the infrared control device, and the infrared control device receives the infrared After the code, the infrared control signal corresponding to the operation instruction can be sent to the set-top box. After receiving the infrared control signal, the set-top box can execute the operation instruction. In this way, it can be realized that the user only needs to input operation instructions on a single remote control to complete the control of the set-top box and the TV.
  • the television before the television receives the first control instruction, when the television and the set-top box are in the standby state at the same time: the television is also used to receive the remote controller in response to the user's power-on operation of the television The second control command sent.
  • the second control instruction is used to instruct the television and the set-top box to switch to the on state.
  • the television is also used to switch to the on state after receiving the second control instruction and send the second infrared code corresponding to the second control instruction to the infrared control device.
  • the infrared control device is also used to send the second infrared code to the set-top box via the infrared line after receiving the second infrared code.
  • the second infrared code is used to instruct the set-top box to switch to the on state.
  • the user can remotely control the TV and the set-top box to turn on at the same time with only one remote control, which simplifies the user's operation.
  • the TV set is also used for receiving the remote controller to send a third control instruction to the TV set in response to the user's standby operation of the TV set.
  • the third control instruction is used to instruct the television and the set-top box to switch to the standby state.
  • the television is also used to switch to the standby state after receiving the third control instruction and send the third infrared code corresponding to the third control instruction to the infrared control device.
  • the infrared control device is also used to send the third infrared code to the set-top box via infrared after receiving the third infrared code.
  • the third infrared code is used to instruct the set-top box to switch to the standby state.
  • the user only needs to use one remote control to control the TV and the set-top box in standby at the same time, which simplifies the user's operation.
  • the television when the television plays the video data of the first channel, the television is also used to receive a fourth control instruction sent by the remote controller in response to the user's operation of switching to the second channel.
  • the television is also used to determine the fourth infrared code corresponding to the channel number of the second channel after receiving the fourth control instruction, and send the fourth infrared code to the infrared control device.
  • the infrared control device is also used to send the fourth infrared code to the set-top box via infrared after receiving the fourth infrared code.
  • the fourth infrared code is used to instruct the set-top box to obtain the video data of the second channel and send the video data of the second channel to the TV for playing.
  • the TV is also used to play the video data of the second channel.
  • the user can remotely control the set-top box through the remote control connected with the TV to cut the station, realize that a remote control can control the TV and the set-top box at the same time, simplifying the user's operation.
  • the method further includes: when the television is playing the video data of the first channel, the television is further configured to receive the remote control sent in response to the user's operation of switching to the second channel.
  • the fourth control instruction The television is also used to send the fifth infrared code corresponding to the fourth control instruction to the infrared control device after receiving the fourth control instruction.
  • the infrared control device is also used to send the fifth infrared code to the set-top box via infrared after receiving the fifth infrared code.
  • the fifth infrared code is used to instruct the set-top box to determine the channel number of the second channel based on the fifth infrared code and the channel number of the first channel, and then obtain the video data of the second channel according to the channel number of the second channel , And send the video data of the second channel to the TV to play.
  • the TV is also used to play the video data of the second channel.
  • the television and the remote control can communicate through Bluetooth low energy or Wi-Fi direct connection
  • the television and the infrared control device can communicate through Bluetooth low energy or Wi-Fi direct connection
  • the present application provides a method for controlling a set-top box, including: a television receiving a first control instruction for a user to select a first channel.
  • the television sends the first infrared code corresponding to the first channel; where the first infrared code is used to instruct the set-top box to obtain the video data of the first channel; the television obtains the video data of the first channel from the set-top box, and Playing the video data of the first channel.
  • the method before the television receives the first control instruction for the user to select the first channel, the method includes: when the television and the set-top box are in a standby state at the same time, the television receives the second control instruction, and The second control instruction is used to instruct the TV and the set-top box to switch to the on state.
  • the television is switched to the on state, and the second infrared code corresponding to the second control instruction is sent.
  • the second infrared code is used to instruct the set-top box to switch to the power-on state.
  • the method further includes: when the television and the set-top box are in the on state at the same time, the television receives a third control instruction, and the third control instruction is used to instruct the television and the set-top box to switch to the standby state;
  • the television set switches to a standby state and sends a third infrared code corresponding to the third control instruction.
  • the third infrared code is used to instruct the set-top box to switch to the standby state.
  • the method further includes: when the television plays the video data of the first channel, the television receives the fourth control instruction.
  • the fourth control instruction is used to instruct the TV to switch to the second channel.
  • the television determines the fourth infrared code corresponding to the channel number of the second channel, and sends the fourth infrared code.
  • the fourth infrared code is used to instruct the set-top box to obtain the video data of the second channel.
  • the television obtains the video data of the second channel from the set-top box and plays the video data of the second channel.
  • the method further includes: when the television plays the video data of the first channel, the television receives the fourth control instruction.
  • the fourth control instruction is used to instruct the television to switch to the second channel.
  • the television sends a fifth infrared code corresponding to the fourth control instruction.
  • the fifth infrared code is used to instruct the set-top box to determine the channel number of the second channel according to the fifth infrared code and the channel number of the first channel, and obtain the video data of the second channel according to the channel number of the second channel.
  • the television obtains the video data of the second channel from the set-top box and plays the video data of the second channel.
  • the present application provides a television, including: a display screen, a communication module, one or more processors, and one or more memories; the one or more memories are coupled with one or more processors, and one Or multiple memories are used to store computer program codes, the computer program codes including computer instructions, when one or more processors execute the computer instructions, make the television execute any one of the possible implementations of any of the above aspects
  • this application provides a computer storage medium, including computer instructions, which when the computer instructions run on a television, cause the television to execute the set-top box control method in any one of the possible implementations of any of the foregoing aspects.
  • this application provides a computer program product, which when the computer program product runs on a television, causes the television to execute the control method of the set-top box in any one of the possible implementations of any of the foregoing aspects.
  • FIG. 1A is a schematic diagram of a system architecture provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram of another system architecture provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 2A is a schematic structural diagram of a TV set provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • 2B is a schematic structural diagram of an infrared control device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • 4A-4B are schematic diagrams of a set of interfaces provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • 6A-6D are schematic diagrams of another set of interfaces provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIGS. 7A-7B are schematic diagrams of another set of interfaces provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIGS. 8A-8B are schematic diagrams of another set of interfaces provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of another system architecture provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • 10A-10B are schematic diagrams of another set of interfaces provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • first and second are only used for descriptive purposes, and cannot be understood as implying or implying relative importance or implicitly specifying the number of indicated technical features. Therefore, the features defined with “first” and “second” may explicitly or implicitly include one or more of these features. In the description of the embodiments of the present application, unless otherwise specified, “multiple” The meaning is two or more.
  • the TV can support infrared remote control and/or low energy Bluetooth (bluetooth low energy, BLE) remote control.
  • BLE Bluetooth low energy
  • the user can press the key 1 that the set-top box remote control wants to learn, and align the infrared transmitter of the set-top box remote control and the infrared transmitter of the TV remote control, and at a position about 1 to 3 cm in a straight line, Then press the "Power" button on the TV remote control, hold it for a period of time (for example, 1 second) and then release it.
  • the set-top box remote control saves the infrared code emitted by the TV remote control when the "power" button on the TV remote control is pressed, and binds the infrared code to button 1 on the set-top box. 4.
  • the remote control of the set-top box can send the infrared code bound to button 1.
  • the set-top box remote control cannot learn the control instructions corresponding to the buttons of the TV remote control or can only perform simple control of the TV, such as the TV Perform simple operations such as power on and off and volume control.
  • the infrared rays emitted by the set-top box remote control cannot pass through obstacles for remote control, and can only remotely control the set-top box or the TV set at a small direction angle.
  • the set-top box remote control learns the infrared code on the TV remote control
  • the user uses the set-top box remote control to control the TV, the user needs to point the infrared transmitter of the set-top box remote control at the infrared receiver on the TV.
  • the user's set-top box remote control controls the set-top box remote control, the user needs to aim at the infrared receiver on the set-top box.
  • the set-top box is far away from the TV, when the user uses the set-top box remote control to control the set-top box and the TV, it is necessary to switch the alignment direction of the infrared transmitter on the set-top box remote control back and forth, which will affect the user experience.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a set-top box control method, system, and related devices.
  • An infrared control device can be placed near the set-top box, wherein the infrared control signal transmitter of the infrared control device is aligned with the infrared control signal on the set-top box Receiver, the infrared control device communicates with the TV through Bluetooth or WiFi.
  • the TV receives the operation instruction input by the user for the set-top box through the remote control, the TV can send the infrared code corresponding to the operation instruction to the infrared control device, and the infrared control device can send the corresponding operation instruction after receiving the infrared code.
  • the infrared control signal to the set-top box.
  • the set-top box After receiving the infrared control signal, the set-top box can execute the operation instruction. In this way, it can be realized that the user only needs to input operation instructions on a single remote control to complete the control of the set-top box and the TV. Moreover, even if the set-top box and the TV are in different directions relative to the remote control, there is no need for the user to deliberately point the remote control in a certain direction when inputting operating instructions, so that the remote control can be in any direction. Control the TV and set-top box. Simplifies the user's operation process and improves the user experience.
  • FIG. 1A is a schematic diagram of the architecture of a system 10 according to an embodiment of the application.
  • the system 10 may include: a TV 110, an infrared control device 120, a remote control 130, a set-top box 140, an electronic program guide (EPG) server 150, and a channel identification server 160.
  • EPG electronic program guide
  • the link connection 101 between the TV 110 and the infrared control device 120 may be a Bluetooth low energy (Bluetooth Low Energy, BLE) connection or a WiFi direct connection.
  • the link connection 102 between the TV 110 and the remote control 130 may be a Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE) connection or a WiFi direct connection.
  • the communication method 103 between the infrared control device 120 and the set-top box 140 may be infrared communication.
  • the link connection 104 between the television 110 and the set-top box 140 may be a high definition multimedia interface (HDMI) cable/audio and video (AV) cable connection.
  • the link connection 105 between the television 110, the infrared code library and the EPG server 150 may be a connection established by the Internet.
  • the link connection 106 between the television 110 and the channel identification server 160 may be a connection established through the Internet.
  • buttons on the remote control 130 there may be multiple buttons on the remote control 130, for example, “up” button, “down” button, “left” button, “right” button, “confirm” button, on/off button, voice input button, and “return” button , “Home” button, “Menu” button, “Volume +” button, “Volume -” button, etc.
  • the remote control 130 can receive user input operations through these multiple keys to control the TV 110 and the set-top box 140.
  • the remote control 130 is not limited to the remote control matched with the television 110, and may also be a terminal such as a mobile phone or a tablet equipped with a remote control application.
  • the remote control interface may include the above-mentioned multiple virtual keys.
  • the keys receive user input operations to control the television 110 and the set-top box 140.
  • the set-top box 140 may be a digital television set-top box or a network television set-top box.
  • the digital TV set-top box may include a digital set-top box that receives cable TV, a digital set-top box that receives satellite TV, and a digital set-top box that receives terrestrial broadcast TV.
  • the set-top box 140 may send the received live video data to the television 110 through the HDMI line or the AV line.
  • the infrared code library and EPG server 150 may store the infrared code library and EPG information of the set-top box of each operator in each region. After the television 110 is bound and connected to the set-top box 140, the television 110 can download the infrared code library and EPG information corresponding to the set-top box 140 from the infrared code library and the EPG server through the Internet. The infrared code library and the EPG server 150 can collect the change information of live TV channels and program information, and synchronize them to the TV 110.
  • the channel recognition server 160 can analyze the image including the channel identifier uploaded by the television 110 through image recognition technology, and determine the channel corresponding to the image, such as "CCTV-1", “Hunan Satellite TV” and so on.
  • the system architecture 11 may include a TV 110, an infrared control device 120, a remote control 130, a set-top box 140, an electronic program guide (EPG) server 150, a channel identification server 160, and a TV box 190.
  • EPG electronic program guide
  • the link connection 1101 between the TV box 190 and the infrared control device 120 may be a Bluetooth low energy (bluetooth low energy, BLE) connection or a WiFi direct connection.
  • the link connection 1102 between the TV box 190 and the remote control 130 may be a Bluetooth low energy (bluetooth low energy, BLE) connection or a WiFi direct connection.
  • the communication method 1103 between the infrared control device 120 and the set-top box 140 may be infrared communication.
  • the link connection 1104 between the TV box 190 and the set-top box 140 may be a high definition multimedia interface (HDMI) cable/audio and video (AV) cable connection.
  • HDMI high definition multimedia interface
  • AV audio and video
  • the link connection 1105 between the TV box 190 and the infrared code library and the EPG server 150 may be a connection established by the Internet (Internet).
  • the link connection 1106 between the TV box 190 and the channel identification server 160 may be a connection established through the Internet.
  • the link connection 1107 between the TV box 190 and the TV 110 may be a high definition multimedia interface (HDMI) cable/audio and video (AV) cable connection.
  • HDMI high definition multimedia interface
  • AV audio and video
  • the TV box 190 is used to output display content to the TV 110, and the TV 110 is used to display the output display content of the TV box 190.
  • the television 110, the infrared control device 120, the remote control 130, the set-top box 140, the electronic program guide (EPG) server 150, and the channel identification server 160 can refer to other illustrated embodiments of this application, which will not be omitted here. Repeat.
  • FIG. 2A exemplarily shows a schematic structural diagram of a television 110 provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the television 110 may include: a processor 111, a memory 112, a wireless communication processing module 113, a power switch 114, a wired LAN communication processing module 115, an HDMI communication processing module 116, a USB communication processing module 117, and a display screen 118, audio module 119, speaker 119A, etc. among them:
  • the processor 111 can be used to read and execute computer-readable instructions.
  • the processor 111 may mainly include a controller, an arithmetic unit, and a register.
  • the controller is mainly responsible for instruction decoding, and sends out control signals for the operation corresponding to the instruction.
  • the arithmetic unit is mainly responsible for saving the register operands and intermediate operation results temporarily stored during the execution of instructions.
  • the hardware architecture of the processor 111 may be an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC) architecture, MIPS architecture, ARM architecture, or NP architecture, etc.
  • the processor 111 may be used to parse the signals received by the wireless communication processing module 113 and/or the wired LAN communication processing module 115, such as a data request sent by the infrared control device 120, a control request sent by the remote control 130, and infrared The code base and infrared code base and EPG information sent by the EPG server 150, and the channel identification result returned by the channel identification server 160.
  • the processor 111 can be used to perform corresponding processing operations according to the analysis result, such as responding to a data request, or controlling the display of the display screen 118 and/or controlling the output of the audio module 119 according to the control request, and so on.
  • the processor 111 may also be used to generate signals sent by the wireless communication processing module 113 and/or the wired LAN communication processing module 115, such as Bluetooth broadcast signals, beacon signals, and for example, sending signals to the infrared control device 120 including Infrared code signal, etc.
  • signals sent by the wireless communication processing module 113 and/or the wired LAN communication processing module 115 such as Bluetooth broadcast signals, beacon signals, and for example, sending signals to the infrared control device 120 including Infrared code signal, etc.
  • the memory 112 is coupled with the processor 111, and is used to store various software programs and/or multiple sets of instructions.
  • the memory 112 may include a high-speed random access memory, and may also include a non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid-state storage devices.
  • the memory 112 may store an operating system, such as embedded operating systems such as uCOS, VxWorks, and RTLinux.
  • the memory 112 may also store a communication program, which may be used to communicate with the infrared control device 120, one or more servers (including the infrared code library and the EPG server 150, the channel recognition server 160), the remote control 130, and the set-top box 140.
  • the wireless communication processing module 113 may include a Bluetooth (BT) communication processing module 113A and a WLAN communication processing module 113B.
  • BT Bluetooth
  • one or more of the Bluetooth (BT) communication processing module 113A and the WLAN communication processing module 113B can monitor signals emitted by other devices (such as the infrared control device 120 and the remote control 130), such as detection requests. , Scanning signals, etc., and can send response signals, such as detection response, scanning response, etc., so that other devices (such as infrared control device 120, remote control 130) can discover the TV 110 and communicate with other devices (such as infrared control device 120).
  • the remote control 130 establishes a wireless communication connection, and communicates with other devices (such as the infrared control device 120 and the remote control 130) through one or more wireless communication technologies in Bluetooth or WLAN.
  • the Bluetooth (BT) communication processing module 113A can provide solutions including one or more of Bluetooth communication in classic Bluetooth (Bluetooth 2.1) or Bluetooth low energy (Bluetooth low energy, BLE).
  • the WLAN communication processing module 113B may include one or more WLAN communication solutions among Wi-Fi direct, Wi-Fi LAN, or Wi-Fi soft AP.
  • one or more of the Bluetooth (BT) communication processing module 113A and the WLAN communication processing module 113B can also transmit signals, such as broadcast Bluetooth signals, beacon signals, so that other devices (such as infrared control devices) 120.
  • the remote control 130 can discover the TV 110, and establish a wireless communication connection with other devices (such as the infrared control device 120, the remote control 130), and communicate with other devices through one or more wireless communication technologies in Bluetooth or WLAN ( For example, the infrared control device 120, the remote controller 130) communicate.
  • the TV 110 can be connected to the Internet through WLAN wireless communication technology to establish a communication connection with servers on the Internet (for example, infrared code library and EPG server 150, channel identification server 160, on-demand resource server, etc.) .
  • servers on the Internet for example, infrared code library and EPG server 150, channel identification server 160, on-demand resource server, etc.
  • the wireless communication processing module 113 may also include an infrared communication processing module (not shown).
  • the infrared communication processing module can communicate with other devices (such as a remote control) through infrared remote control technology.
  • the power switch 114 can be used to control the power supply to the display 118.
  • the wired LAN communication processing module 115 can be used to communicate with other devices in the same LAN via a wired LAN, and can also be used to connect to a WAN via a wired LAN, and can communicate with devices in the WAN.
  • the HDMI communication processing module 116 may be used to communicate with devices such as the set-top box 140 through an HDMI interface (not shown). For example, the HDMI communication processing module 116 may receive live video data sent by the set-top box 140 through an HDMI interface (not shown), and so on.
  • the USB communication processing module 117 can be used to communicate with other devices through a USB interface (not shown).
  • the display screen 118 can be used to display images, videos, etc.
  • the display screen 118 may adopt a liquid crystal display (LCD), an organic light-emitting diode (OLED) display, or an active-matrix organic light emitting diode (AMOLED).
  • LCD liquid crystal display
  • OLED organic light-emitting diode
  • AMOLED active-matrix organic light emitting diode
  • Display screen flexible light-emitting diode (FLED) display screen, quantum dot emitting diode (QLED) display screen, etc.
  • the audio module 119 can be used to convert digital audio signals into analog audio signals for output, and can also be used to convert analog audio inputs into digital audio signals.
  • the audio module 119 can also be used to encode and decode audio signals.
  • the audio module 119 may be installed in the processor 111, or some functional modules of the audio module 119 may be installed in the processor 111.
  • the audio module 119 can transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 113 through a bus interface (such as a UART interface, etc.), so as to realize the function of playing audio signals through a Bluetooth speaker.
  • the speaker 119A may be used to convert the audio signal sent by the audio module 119 into a sound signal.
  • the television 110 may further include a microphone 119B, also called a “microphone” or a “microphone” for converting sound signals into electrical signals.
  • a microphone 119B also called a “microphone” or a “microphone” for converting sound signals into electrical signals.
  • FIG. 2B exemplarily shows a schematic structural diagram of an infrared control device 120 provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the infrared control device 120 may include: a processor 121, a memory 122, a wireless communication processing module 113, an infrared transmitter 124, a power supply module 125, and so on. among them:
  • the processor 121 may be used to read and execute computer-readable instructions.
  • the processor 121 may mainly include a controller, an arithmetic unit, and a register.
  • the controller is mainly responsible for instruction decoding, and sends out control signals for the operation corresponding to the instruction.
  • the arithmetic unit is mainly responsible for saving the register operands and intermediate operation results temporarily stored during the execution of instructions.
  • the hardware architecture of the processor 121 may be an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC) architecture, MIPS architecture, ARM architecture, NP architecture, or the like.
  • the processor 121 may be used to parse the signal received by the wireless communication processing module 113, such as a signal including an infrared code sent by the television 110, and so on.
  • the processor 121 may also be used to generate signals sent from the wireless communication processing module 113, such as Bluetooth broadcast signals, beacon signals, and infrared control signals sent according to received infrared codes, and so on.
  • the memory 122 is coupled with the processor 121, and is used to store various software programs and/or multiple sets of instructions.
  • the memory 122 may include a high-speed random access device, and may also include a non-volatile memory, such as one or more flash memory devices or other non-volatile solid-state storage devices.
  • the memory 122 may store a communication program, and the communication program may be used to communicate with the television 110 and the set-top box 140.
  • the wireless communication processing module 123 may include one or more of a Bluetooth (BT) communication processing module 123A, a WLAN communication processing module 123B, and an infrared communication processing module 123C.
  • BT Bluetooth
  • WLAN Wireless Fidelity
  • infrared communication processing module 123C an infrared communication processing module
  • one or more of the Bluetooth (BT) communication processing module 123A and the WLAN communication processing module 123B can monitor signals emitted by other devices (such as the TV 110), such as detection requests, scanning signals, etc., and can send The response signal, such as detection response, scan response, etc., enables other devices (such as the TV 110) to discover the infrared control device 120 and establish a wireless communication connection with other devices (such as the TV 110).
  • the Bluetooth (BT) communication processing module 113A can provide solutions that include one or more of Bluetooth communication in classic Bluetooth (Bluetooth 2.1) or Bluetooth low energy (Bluetooth low energy, BLE).
  • the WLAN communication processing module 113B may include one or more WLAN communication solutions among Wi-Fi direct, Wi-Fi LAN, or Wi-Fi soft AP.
  • the infrared communication processing module 123C can modulate the infrared control signal according to the infrared code, and send the infrared control signal through the infrared transmitter 124.
  • the infrared transmitter 124 may be an infrared light-emitting diode, which is used to radiate an infrared control signal to the outside.
  • the infrared control device 120 may further include an infrared receiver (not shown), which may be connected to the infrared communication processing module 123C for receiving infrared signals.
  • the infrared control device 120 may include multiple infrared transmitters 124 for increasing the radiation angle of the infrared control signal. For example, by arranging multiple infrared emitters 124 around the infrared control device 120, the infrared control signal coverage of the infrared control device 120 can be increased.
  • the infrared control device 120 includes a plurality of infrared transmitters 124, the infrared control device 120 can control any one or more of the plurality of infrared transmitters 124 to individually emit infrared control signals.
  • the power management module 125 can be used to connect a battery (not shown), a charging management module (not shown) and the processor 121.
  • the power management module 125 receives input from a battery (not shown) and/or a charging management module (not shown), and supplies power to the processor 121, the memory 122, the wireless communication processing module 123, the infrared transmitter 124, and the like.
  • the power management module 125 can also be used to monitor parameters such as battery capacity, battery cycle times, and battery health status (leakage, impedance).
  • the infrared control device 120 may be integrated with other devices (for example, a Bluetooth speaker or the above-mentioned television 110, etc.), and the infrared control device 120 may include more components.
  • the infrared control device 120 when the infrared control device 120 is a Bluetooth speaker with an infrared remote control function, the infrared control device 120 may also include an audio module (not shown), a speaker (not shown), and a microphone (not shown). ,and many more.
  • the audio module can be used to convert digital audio signals into analog audio signals for output, and can also be used to convert analog audio inputs into digital audio signals.
  • the audio module can also be used to encode and decode audio signals.
  • the audio module (not shown) may be installed in the processor 121, or part of the functional modules of the audio module (not shown) may be installed in the processor 121.
  • the TV 110 can send a message to the TV 110 after receiving a control command input by the user (such as a power-on command, a channel selection command, a channel cut command, a standby command, etc.) Send the infrared code corresponding to the control command.
  • a control command input by the user such as a power-on command, a channel selection command, a channel cut command, a standby command, etc.
  • Send the infrared code corresponding to the control command Send the infrared code corresponding to the control command.
  • the set-top box 140 may perform operations corresponding to the control instruction (for example, power on, select a designated channel, switch channels, standby, etc.).
  • operations corresponding to the control instruction for example, power on, select a designated channel, switch channels, standby, etc.
  • the following exemplarily introduces a set-top box control method provided in an embodiment of the present application based on the system 10 shown in FIG. 1A.
  • the TV 110 may receive the user's power-on operation through the remote control 130 to light up the display screen.
  • the television 110 can send an infrared control signal to the set-top box 140 through the infrared control device 120, so that the set-top box 140 is turned on synchronously. In this way, the time for the user to wait for the television 110 and the set-top box 140 to be turned on can be saved.
  • the television 110 may display a home page interface, which may include multiple live channel options on the organic top box 140.
  • the television 110 can send an infrared control signal through the infrared control device 120 to control the set-top box 140 to output the video data of the live channel to the television 110.
  • a certain live channel option for example, Hunan Satellite TV option
  • the television 110 can send an infrared control signal through the infrared control device 120 to control the set-top box 140 to output the video data of the live channel to the television 110.
  • the live channel options and on-demand resource information are displayed on the homepage of the TV 110, so that the TV 110 can quickly switch between the live source and the on-demand source.
  • Fig. 3 exemplarily shows a flow chart of a method for controlling a set-top box provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the TV 110 can establish a wireless connection with the remote control 130 (such as a Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE) connection), and the TV 110 can establish a wireless connection with the infrared control device 120 (such as a BLE connection or Wi-Fi direct). Connection), the TV 110 and the set-top box 140 can establish a wired connection through an HDMI cable/AV cable, and the infrared control device 120 can send a control command to the set-top box through infrared rays.
  • BLE Bluetooth Low Energy
  • a method for controlling a set-top box may include:
  • the television 110 acquires the infrared code library and EPG data.
  • the TV 110 may first obtain the model of the set-top box 140. Then, the television 110 obtains the infrared code library and electronic program guide (EPG) data corresponding to the set top box 140 from the infrared code library and the EPG server 150 according to the model of the set top box 140.
  • the infrared code library includes the correspondence between the control instructions of the set-top box 140 and the infrared code (also referred to as infrared waveform coded data), and the correspondence between the live channel (indicated by the channel number) and the infrared code.
  • different infrared codes can be used to modulate different infrared control signals.
  • the EPG data includes the correspondence between the channel number and the TV station, and the program data of each TV station.
  • the channel number "023” corresponds to "Hunan Satellite TV”
  • the channel number "024" corresponds to "Zhejiang Satellite TV”
  • "029” corresponds to "China Central Television 1 (CCTV-1)”
  • the program data of each TV station may include program information within a certain period of time, such as "Hunan Satellite TV, 19:00-19:30 News Broadcast”, "Zhejiang Satellite TV, 21:00-23:00 China Good Voice", and so on.
  • the infrared code libraries provided by different operators in different regions may be different, in order to ensure that the infrared code library downloaded by the television 110 matches the set-top box 140.
  • the following possible implementations can be used to ensure that the television 110 downloads to the infrared code library that matches the set-top box 140 correctly:
  • the television 110 can download a set-top box model list from a network server. After the television and the set-top box 140 are connected, the television 110 can display multiple set-top box model options for the user to choose according to the set-top box model list.
  • the television 110 may receive a user's selection input for the first model option among the multiple set-top box model options, and in response to the selection input for the first model option, the television 110 may determine the first model selected by the user as the set-top box 140 (for example, "HC2600") model. After the model of the set-top box 140 is determined, the television 110 can download the infrared code library and EPG data corresponding to the model of the set-top box 140 from the infrared code library and the EPG server 150.
  • the TV 110 can sequentially send infrared test codes corresponding to different set-top box models (for example, the infrared codes corresponding to the on/off instructions) to the infrared control device 120, and the infrared control device 120 can modulate the infrared test signals according to the infrared test codes , And launch the infrared test signal outward. If the set-top box 140 sends a response signal to the TV 110 through the HDMI or AV cable after receiving the infrared test signal, the TV 110 can determine that the model corresponding to the infrared test code is the set-top box 140 after receiving the response signal Model.
  • infrared test codes corresponding to different set-top box models for example, the infrared codes corresponding to the on/off instructions
  • infrared test signals corresponding to different set-top box models can be shown in Table 1 below:
  • the infrared test code corresponding to the STB model "WH1000” is “0x01”
  • the infrared test code corresponding to the STB model “GT2400” is “1x01”
  • the infrared test code corresponding to the STB model “HC2600” is “ 2x01”.
  • the infrared test code corresponding to the set-top box model "AR2300” is “3x01”.
  • the infrared test code corresponding to the set-top box model "NP2130” is "4x01".
  • the television 110 may send infrared test codes "0x01”, “2x01”, “3x01”, “4x01", and the like outwards in sequence through the infrared control device 120.
  • the television 110 can determine that "HC2600” is the model of the set-top box 140.
  • the above examples are only used to explain the application and should not constitute a limitation.
  • the TV 110 can intercept the TV station identified by the station logo of the TV station from the broadcast screen of the switched channel and whether the TV station corresponding to the channel number expected to be switched to in the EPG data is the same to verify the obtained infrared code Whether the library matches the set-top box 140. If it matches, the television 110 can use the infrared code library to remotely control the set-top box 140 through the infrared control device 120. If it does not match, the TV 110 can re-download another set of infrared code libraries and verify whether it matches with the set-top box 140 until it finds an infrared code library that matches the set-top box 140.
  • the TV 110 is currently playing the program of Central Station 1, and the channel number is 1.
  • the TV 110 encapsulates the infrared code corresponding to the "UP" key in the current infrared code library into a data packet, and uses BLE or Wi -Fi direct connection and send to infrared control device 120.
  • the infrared control device 120 transmits the infrared control signal corresponding to the infrared code through the infrared code to remotely control the set-top box 140 to switch to the next channel.
  • the television 110 may intercept the logo of the television station in the playback screen of the switched channel, and upload the logo to the channel identification server 160.
  • the channel identification server 160 can identify the channel number corresponding to the station logo, and return the channel number to the television 110.
  • the TV 110 can determine from the EPG data that the channel to be switched to is the central 2 channel, and the number is 2. If the channel identification server 160 recognizes that the switched channel number is 2 and is consistent with the expected channel number to be switched to, the infrared code library currently used by the television 110 is correct. If the channel identification server 160 recognizes that the switched channel number is 10, which is inconsistent with the channel number expected to be switched to, the TV 110 can download another infrared code library from the infrared code library and the EPG server 150 again. Or select another set of infrared control signal libraries from the multiple sets of infrared control signal libraries that have been downloaded by the television 110 for verification.
  • the above examples are only used to explain the application and should not constitute a limitation.
  • the remote control 130 may receive a user's power-on operation of the TV.
  • the remote control 130 In response to the power-on operation, the remote control 130 sends a TV power-on instruction to the TV 110.
  • the remote control 130 may include one or more physical buttons, such as on/off button, "up” button, “down” button, “left” button, “right” button, “OK” button, "home” button, “ Menu” button, etc.
  • the power-on operation for the television 110 may be that the user presses the on/off button on the remote control 130. After the remote control 130 receives the user's pressing operation on the on/off button, it can send a power on instruction to the television 110.
  • the remote control 130 may receive the user's voice input, and the remote control 130 may send the voice input by the user (for example, "Xiaoyi Xiaoyi, turn on the TV") to the TV 110, the TV 110
  • the boot command can be parsed from the voice.
  • the boot instruction may be referred to as the second control instruction, and the infrared code corresponding to the boot instruction may be referred to as the second infrared code, which is also applicable in other embodiments.
  • the TV 110 responds to the received power-on instruction to turn on.
  • the infrared code corresponding to the set-top box boot instruction is matched from the infrared code library corresponding to the set-top box 140.
  • the television 110 sends the infrared code corresponding to the boot instruction of the set-top box to the infrared control device 120.
  • the infrared control device 120 sends a power-on infrared control signal to the outside according to the infrared code corresponding to the power-on instruction. S308.
  • the set-top box 140 is turned on after receiving the power-on infrared control signal.
  • the infrared code library corresponding to the set-top box 140 may be as shown in Table 2 below:
  • Control instruction Infrared code On/off 2x01 Volume up 2x02 Volume down 2x03 Channel number 001 2x04 Channel number 002 2x05 Channel number 003 2x06 Channel number 004 2x07 Channel number 005 2x08 Channel number 006 2x09 Channel number 007 2x10 ... ...
  • the infrared code corresponding to the on/off command is "2x01”
  • the infrared code corresponding to "volume up” is “2x02”
  • the infrared code corresponding to "volume down” is “2x03”
  • the channel number is 001.
  • the infrared code is "2x04”
  • the infrared code corresponding to channel number 002 is “2x05”
  • the infrared code corresponding to channel number 003 is “2x06”
  • the infrared code corresponding to channel number 004 is "2x07”
  • the infrared code corresponding to channel number 005 is "2x07”.
  • the television 110 can encapsulate the infrared code (for example, “2x01”) corresponding to the power-on instruction into a data packet through BLE or Wi-Fi direct connection technology, and send it to the infrared control device 120.
  • the infrared control device 120 After the infrared control device 120 receives the infrared code (such as "2x01”) corresponding to the boot instruction, the infrared control device 120 can modulate the boot infrared control signal according to the infrared code (such as "2x01”) corresponding to the boot instruction, and pass The infrared transmitter sends the power-on infrared control signal.
  • the TV 110 can send the infrared code library corresponding to the set-top box 140 to the infrared control device 120, and the TV 110 can encapsulate the boot command into data through BLE or Wi-Fi direct connection technology.
  • the packet is sent to the infrared control device 120.
  • the infrared control device 120 can parse the boot instruction from the data packet, and determine the infrared code corresponding to the boot instruction (for example, "2x01"). Then, the infrared control device 120 can modulate the power-on infrared control signal, and send the power-on infrared control signal through the infrared transmitter.
  • the television 110 may display the live channel information of the set-top box.
  • the TV 110 can display the live channel information in the EPG data of the set-top box and the on-demand video information on the TV 110 together in the same application interface on the TV 110, and the user only needs to open An application on the TV 110 can watch live channels and on-demand videos, which makes the user's operation more convenient.
  • the homepage application interface 410 may be displayed.
  • the home page application interface 410 may include a title option bar 411, including my channel option, home page option, live broadcast option 412, TV option, movie option, variety show option, children option, special area option, search option, and so on.
  • the video resources under the option columns of TV series, movies, variety shows, children's area, etc. may be obtained by the TV 110 from the on-demand server through the Internet.
  • the television 110 may display one or more live broadcast channel options.
  • the live broadcast channel option displays the current program poster and the program name of the live broadcast channel.
  • the television 110 can obtain the name of the program currently played on the live channel from the EPG data, and then obtain the program poster corresponding to the program name from the server on the network according to the program name.
  • the live broadcast channel can be classified into CCTV channels (for example, CCTV-1, CCTV-2, CCTV-3, CCTV-5, etc.), satellite TV channels (for example, Guangdong Satellite TV, Hunan Satellite TV, Zhejiang Satellite TV, Jiangsu Satellite TV, Etc.), local channels (for example, Jiangsu City, Jiangsu Variety Show, Jiangsu Film and Television, Jiangsu Finance).
  • CCTV channels for example, CCTV-1, CCTV-2, CCTV-3, CCTV-5, etc.
  • satellite TV channels for example, Guangdong Satellite TV, Hunan Satellite TV, Zhejiang Satellite TV, Jiangsu Satellite TV, Etc.
  • local channels for example, Jiangsu City, Jiangsu Variety Show, Jiangsu Film and Television, Jiangsu Finance.
  • the remote controller 130 may receive a user's selection operation for the first channel. S311. In response to the selection operation for the first channel, the remote control 130 may send a selection instruction for the first channel to the television 110.
  • the first channel may be Hunan Satellite TV
  • the remote control 130 may use one or more buttons (such as “up” button, “down” button, “left” button, “right” button and The “OK” button) receives the user's selection operation.
  • the remote control 130 can send a button instruction to the television 110.
  • the TV 110 moves the selection box to the first channel option according to the selection box movement instruction sent by the remote control 130.
  • the remote control 130 can receive the user's input operation on the confirmation button, and send a confirmation instruction to the TV 110, and the TV 110 can determine the first channel selected by the user (for example, Hunan Satellite TV).
  • the remote control 130 can receive a user's voice input (for example, "Xiaoyi Xiaoyi, I want to watch Hunan Satellite TV").
  • the remote control 130 may send the voice data input by the user to the television 110.
  • the television 110 can parse the user's selection instruction for the first channel (for example, Hunan Satellite TV) from the voice data.
  • the remote control 130 may collect the user's voice data after the user presses the voice input button 132.
  • the remote control 130 can send the collected voice data to the television 110.
  • the television 110 can extract the keyword "Hunan Satellite TV” from the voice data, and can determine that the first channel selected by the user is Hunan Satellite TV.
  • the selection instruction for the first channel may be referred to as the first control instruction, and other embodiments are also applicable.
  • the television 110 can match the infrared code corresponding to the first channel from the infrared code library.
  • the television 110 may send the infrared code corresponding to the first channel to the infrared control device 120.
  • the infrared control device 120 may send out the infrared control signal corresponding to the first channel according to the infrared code corresponding to the first channel.
  • the television 110 can determine the channel number of the first channel from the channel list in the EPG data. Then, the television 110 can match the infrared code corresponding to the first channel from the infrared code library. The television 110 may send the infrared code corresponding to the first channel to the infrared control device 120 through BLE or WiFi direct connection. After receiving the infrared code, the infrared control device 120 may modulate the infrared control signal of the first channel according to the infrared code, and send the infrared control signal to the outside.
  • the channel list in the EPG data may be as shown in Table 3 below:
  • the channel number of "Hunan Satellite TV” is “023”
  • the channel number of "Zhejiang Satellite TV” is “024"
  • the channel number of "Guangdong Satellite TV” is “025"
  • the channel number of "Guangxi Satellite TV” is “026”
  • the channel number of "Shandong Satellite TV” is “027”
  • the channel number of "Shanxi Satellite TV” is “028”
  • the channel number of "CCTV-1” is “029”
  • the channel number of "CCTV-2” is “030”.
  • the infrared code corresponding to the first channel may be referred to as the first infrared code, and other embodiments are also applicable.
  • the set-top box 140 may obtain the video data of the first channel. S316. The set-top box 140 sends the video data of the first channel to the television 110.
  • the set-top box 140 When the set-top box 140 is a digital set-top box that receives cable television, the set-top box 140 can receive signals on multiple channels sent by a broadcast television network through a coaxial cable. After the set-top box 140 receives the infrared control signal corresponding to the first channel, the set-top box 140 can decode only the video data of the first channel, and send the video data of the first channel to the television 110 through the HDMI cable or the AV cable.
  • the set-top box 140 may store the satellite signal receiving frequency band corresponding to each television channel. After the set-top box 140 receives the infrared control signal corresponding to the first channel, the set-top box 140 can determine the satellite signal receiving frequency band corresponding to the first channel, and receive the satellite signal on the satellite signal receiving frequency band corresponding to the first channel, and then receive the satellite signal Decode the video data of the first channel. After decoding the video data of the first channel, the set-top box 140 may send the video data of the first channel to the television 110 via the HDMI cable or the AV cable.
  • the set-top box 140 may store the broadcast signal receiving frequency band corresponding to each television channel. After the set-top box 140 receives the infrared control signal corresponding to the first channel, the set-top box 140 can determine the broadcasting signal receiving frequency band corresponding to the first channel, and receive the broadcasting signal on the broadcasting signal receiving frequency band corresponding to the first channel, and then from the broadcasting signal. The video data of the first channel is decoded from the signal. After decoding the video data of the first channel, the set-top box 140 may send the video data of the first channel to the television 110 via the HDMI cable or the AV cable.
  • the set-top box 140 is a network TV set-top box
  • the set-top box 140 can download the live video data of the first channel from the Internet server, and set the first channel to be The live video data is sent to the television 110 through the HDMI cable or the AV cable.
  • the television 110 plays the video data of the first channel.
  • the first channel may be "Hunan Satellite TV".
  • the television 110 receives the video data of "Hunan Satellite TV”
  • it can play the video data of "Hunan Satellite TV”.
  • the video screen played by the television 110 may include the logo of the first channel (for example, the logo of Hunan Satellite TV 421).
  • the television 110 and the set-top box 140 when the television 110 and the set-top box 140 are turned on, if the television 110 receives a standby instruction, the television 110 can switch to the standby state and simultaneously send a control signal through the infrared control device 140
  • the infrared control signal of the set-top box 140 standby is sent to the set-top box 140 to control the set-top box 140 to be standby.
  • the synchronous standby of the TV 110 can be realized through a remote control to realize the synchronous standby control of the TV and the set-top box, which facilitates the operation of the user.
  • the standby instruction may also be referred to as the third control instruction, and the infrared code corresponding to the standby instruction may be referred to as the third infrared code, and other embodiments are also applicable.
  • the TV 110 when the TV 110 is playing the video data of the first channel (for example, Hunan Satellite TV) sent by the set-top box 140, it can receive the user's switch operation through the remote control 130, and send the infrared control signal through the infrared control device 120 Give the infrared set-top box 140 so that the set-top box 140 switches to the second channel.
  • the user only needs to input operation instructions on a single remote control to complete the cutting control of the set-top box.
  • the set-top box and the TV are in different directions relative to the remote control, there is no need for the user to deliberately point the remote control in a certain direction when inputting operating instructions, so that the remote control can be in any direction.
  • Complete the cutting control of the set top box Simplifies the user's operation process and improves the user experience.
  • the TV 110 may establish a wireless connection with the remote control 130 (for example, a Bluetooth low energy (BLE) connection), and the TV 110 may establish a wireless connection with the infrared control device 120 (for example, a BLE connection or Wi-Fi direct connection), the TV 110 and the set-top box 140 may establish a wired connection through an HDMI cable/AV cable, and the infrared control device 120 may send a control command to the set-top box 140 through infrared rays.
  • the infrared code library and EPG data corresponding to the organic top box 140 are downloaded to the television 110.
  • the television 110 is currently playing a program video of Hunan Satellite TV.
  • the program video of Hunan Satellite TV is sent by the set-top box 140 to the television 110 through the HDMI cable or the AV cable.
  • the television 110 displays a program video screen 510 of Hunan Satellite TV, and the program video screen 510 includes the station logo 511 of Hunan Satellite TV.
  • the remote control 130 can receive the user's input operation (for example, click) on the "up" (channel plus) button. In response to the input operation on the "up" (channel plus) button, the remote control 130 can press the "up” button. The corresponding control instruction is encapsulated into a data packet and sent to the television 110.
  • the user's input operation for example, click
  • the remote control 130 can press the "up” button.
  • the corresponding control instruction is encapsulated into a data packet and sent to the television 110.
  • the television 110 can determine the channel number of the current live broadcast channel of the television 110 after receiving the control command corresponding to the "up" (channel plus) button.
  • the TV 110 can determine the channel number of the current live channel in the following manner: the TV 110 intercepts the TV station logo from the broadcast screen of the current live channel, and uploads the logo to the channel identification server 160.
  • the channel identification server 160 can identify the channel number corresponding to the logo, and return the channel number to the television 110.
  • the TV 110 After the TV 110 determines the channel number of the current live channel, it can determine the channel number of the live channel after the channel is cut according to the control command corresponding to the "up” button. For example, the current live broadcast channel is "Hunan Satellite TV” and the channel number is "023".
  • the control command corresponding to the "up” (channel plus) button is to switch to the next live channel of the current live channel. From the channel list in the EPG data, the TV 110 finds that the next live channel of "Hunan Satellite TV” (channel number is "023”) is "Zhejiang Satellite TV” (the channel number is "024"), which is the second channel It is "Zhejiang Satellite TV” and the channel number is "024".
  • the television 110 can query the infrared code corresponding to the second channel from the downloaded infrared code library, and send the infrared code to the infrared control device 120 through BLE or Wi-Fi direct connection.
  • the corresponding relationship between the channel number and the infrared code in the infrared code library can be shown as follows:
  • the infrared code corresponding to channel number "023” is “2x27”
  • the infrared code corresponding to channel number "024" is “2x28”
  • the infrared code corresponding to channel number "025" is “2x29”.
  • the infrared code corresponding to channel number "026” is “2x30”
  • the infrared code corresponding to channel number "027” is “2x31”
  • the infrared code corresponding to channel number "028” is “2x32”
  • the infrared code corresponding to channel number "029” The code is “2x33”
  • the infrared code corresponding to the channel number "030” is “2x34”.
  • the infrared code library may include more channel numbers and their corresponding infrared codes, which is not limited here.
  • the infrared control device 120 After the infrared control device 120 receives the infrared code (for example, "2x28") corresponding to the second channel (for example, "Zhejiang Satellite TV"), the infrared control device 120 can modulate according to the received infrared code (for example, "2x28")
  • the infrared control signal corresponding to the second channel, and the infrared control signal of the second channel (such as "Zhejiang Satellite TV”) is sent through an infrared transmitter.
  • the set-top box 140 After receiving the infrared control signal corresponding to the second channel, the set-top box 140 can obtain the video data of the second channel. among them:
  • the set-top box 140 When the set-top box 140 is a digital set-top box that receives cable television, the set-top box 140 can receive signals on multiple channels sent by a broadcast television network through a coaxial cable. After the set-top box 140 receives the infrared control signal corresponding to the second channel, the set-top box 140 may decode only the video data of the second channel, and send the video data of the second channel to the television 110 via the HDMI cable or the AV cable.
  • the set-top box 140 may store the satellite signal receiving frequency band corresponding to each television channel. After the set-top box 140 receives the infrared control signal corresponding to the second channel, the set-top box 140 can determine the satellite signal receiving frequency band corresponding to the second channel, and receive the satellite signal on the satellite signal receiving frequency band corresponding to the second channel, and then receive the satellite signal Decode the video data of the second channel. After decoding the video data of the second channel, the set-top box 140 may send the video data of the second channel to the television 110 via the HDMI cable or the AV cable.
  • the set-top box 140 may store the broadcast signal receiving frequency band corresponding to each television channel. After the set-top box 140 receives the infrared control signal corresponding to the second channel, the set-top box 140 can determine the broadcasting signal receiving frequency band corresponding to the second channel, and receive the broadcasting signal on the broadcasting signal receiving frequency band corresponding to the second channel, and then from the broadcasting signal. The video data of the second channel is decoded from the signal. After decoding the video data of the second channel, the set-top box 140 may send the video data of the second channel to the television 110 via the HDMI cable or the AV cable.
  • the set-top box 140 is a network TV set-top box
  • the set-top box 140 can download the live video data of the second channel from the Internet server, and set the second channel to The live video data is sent to the television 110 through the HDMI cable or the AV cable.
  • the television 110 can send the remote control code corresponding to the channel cut operation to the infrared control device 120.
  • the infrared control device 120 can modulate the remote control code into an infrared control signal and radiate it outward.
  • the set-top box 140 After the set-top box 140 receives the infrared control signal, it can parse out the channel cut command, and according to the channel cut command and the channel number of the first channel, determine the channel number expected to switch to the second channel, and receive the second channel.
  • the video data of the channel is a channel cut instruction (such as channel addition, channel reduction) input by the user through the remote control 130, it can send the remote control code corresponding to the channel cut operation to the infrared control device 120.
  • the infrared control device 120 can modulate the remote control code into an infrared control signal and radiate it outward.
  • the set-top box 140 After the set-top box 140 receives the infrared control signal, it can parse out the channel cut command, and
  • the channel cut instruction may be called the fourth control instruction
  • the infrared code corresponding to the second channel after the channel cut may be called the fourth infrared code
  • the channel cut instruction (such as "channel plus” instruction/or "channel The infrared code corresponding to the “minus” instruction) may be referred to as the fifth infrared code, which is also applicable in other embodiments.
  • the television 110 After the television 110 receives the video data of the second channel (for example, "Zhejiang Satellite TV"), it plays the video data of the second channel.
  • the video data of the second channel for example, "Zhejiang Satellite TV”
  • the second channel may be "Zhejiang Satellite TV".
  • the television 110 receives the video data of "Zhejiang Satellite TV”
  • it can play the video data of the "Zhejiang Satellite TV”.
  • the video screen 520 of the second channel (for example, "Zhejiang Satellite TV") may include the station logo of the second channel (for example, the "Zhejiang Satellite TV” logo 521).
  • the TV 110 when the TV 110 is currently playing the video data of the first channel, the TV 110 can receive the input operation of the user through the remote control 130 (for example, click the "menu" button on the remote control 130), Display the channel list.
  • the channel list includes multiple channel options, and the channel name and channel number can be displayed on the channel options.
  • the TV 110 can receive the user's selection input for the second channel option in the channel list through the remote control 130.
  • the TV 110 can control the set-top box 140 to switch to the second channel through the infrared control device 120.
  • the television 110 is currently playing a program video of Hunan Satellite TV.
  • the program video of Hunan Satellite TV is sent by the set-top box 140 to the television 110 through the HDMI cable or the AV cable.
  • the television 110 displays a program video screen 510 of Hunan Satellite TV, and the program video screen 510 includes the station logo 511 of Hunan Satellite TV.
  • the program video screen 510 shown in FIG. 6A is the same as the program video screen 510 shown in FIG. 5A.
  • the remote control 130 can receive the user's input operation (for example, click) on the menu button 136. In response to the input operation on the menu button 136, the remote control 130 can encapsulate the control command corresponding to the menu button 136 into a data packet and send it to Television 110.
  • the user's input operation for example, click
  • the remote control 130 can encapsulate the control command corresponding to the menu button 136 into a data packet and send it to Television 110.
  • the television 110 may display the channel list 530 after receiving the control instruction corresponding to the menu button 136.
  • the channel list includes one or more channel options (such as "Hunan Satellite TV” option, “Zhejiang Satellite TV” option, “Guangdong Satellite TV” option, “Guangxi Satellite TV” option, “Shandong Satellite TV” option, “Shanxi Satellite TV” option Option, “CCTV-1” option, “CCTV-2” option, etc.).
  • the channel name and channel number can be displayed on the channel option. Since the television 110 is currently playing the video data of "Hunan Satellite TV", the starting position of the selection box 531 may be on the "Hunan Satellite TV” option.
  • the television 110 may receive the user's input operation through the remote control 130 (for example, by pressing the "up” button or the “down” button on the remote control 130 one or more times), as shown in FIG. 6C, in response to the input operation ,
  • the television 110 can move the position of the selection frame 531 to the second channel option (for example, the "CCTV-1" option).
  • the remote control 130 may send a confirmation instruction to the television 110.
  • the television 110 After the television 110 receives the confirmation command, it can determine the infrared code corresponding to the second channel (such as "2x33") from the downloaded infrared code library according to the channel number of the second channel (such as "029"), and The infrared code is sent to the infrared control device 120 via BLE or Wi-Fi.
  • the infrared control device 120 After the infrared control device 120 receives the infrared code (for example, "0x33") corresponding to the second channel (for example, "CCTV-1"), the infrared control device 120 can modulate according to the received infrared code (for example, "2x33")
  • the infrared control signal corresponding to the second channel for example, "CCTV-1” is output, and the infrared control signal of the second channel (for example, "CCTV-1") is sent through an infrared transmitter.
  • the set-top box 140 After receiving the infrared control signal corresponding to the second channel, the set-top box 140 can obtain the video data of the second channel.
  • the embodiments shown in FIG. 5A to FIG. 5B which will not be repeated here.
  • the television 110 After the television 110 receives the video data of the second channel (for example, "CCTV-1"), it plays the video data of the second channel.
  • the video data of the second channel for example, "CCTV-1"
  • the second channel may be "CCTV-1".
  • the television 110 receives the video data of "CCTV-1”
  • it can play the video data of "CCTV-1”.
  • the video screen 540 of the second channel (for example, "CCTV-1") may include The station logo of the second channel (for example, "CCTV-1" station logo 541).
  • the product form of the infrared control device 120 is not limited.
  • the infrared control device 120 may be a device in the form of a product such as a Bluetooth speaker shown in FIG. 6A, or may be such as
  • the control device shown in Fig. 6B has both Bluetooth/Wi-Fi communication and infrared communication functions.
  • the infrared control device 120 can also be integrated with the TV 110, and so on.
  • the current set-top box 140 is sending the video data of the first channel to the television 110 for playing.
  • the TV 110 can receive a control instruction input by the user (for example, the TV 110 can collect the user's voice signal and convert the voice signal into a control instruction), and through the infrared control device 120, control the set-top box 140 to switch the live channel (for example, switch to Channel 2) and other operations.
  • the television 110 may have an audio collection device, which can collect the user's voice signal.
  • the TV set 110 may also collect the user's voice signal through the remote control 110 with an audio collecting device.
  • an audio collection device for example, a microphone
  • the remote control 130 may receive an input operation (for example, pressing) for triggering the voice input button 132 by the user, the remote control 130 may
  • the voice input by the user is collected (for example, "Xiaoyi Xiaoyi, I want to watch CCTV-1"), and the voice input by the user is converted into a voice signal and sent to the television 110.
  • the television 110 After the television 110 receives the voice signal sent by the remote control 130, it can parse out the control instruction (for example, switch the live channel to "CCTV-1").
  • the TV 110 can determine the channel number (for example, "029") of the second channel (for example, "CCTV-1") after the channel cut from the channel list of the EPG data according to the control instruction.
  • the television 110 can determine the infrared code (for example, "2x33”) corresponding to the second channel from the infrared code library according to the channel number of the second channel, and send the infrared code to the infrared control device 120 via BLE or Wi-Fi. .
  • the infrared control device 120 After the infrared control device 120 receives the infrared code (for example, "0x33") corresponding to the second channel (for example, "CCTV-1"), the infrared control device 120 can modulate according to the received infrared code (for example, "2x33")
  • the infrared control signal corresponding to the second channel for example, "CCTV-1” is output, and the infrared control signal of the second channel (for example, "CCTV-1") is sent through an infrared transmitter.
  • the set-top box 140 After receiving the infrared control signal corresponding to the second channel, the set-top box 140 can obtain the video data of the second channel.
  • the embodiments shown in FIG. 5A to FIG. 5B which will not be repeated here.
  • the television 110 After the television 110 receives the video data of the second channel (for example, "CCTV-1"), it plays the video data of the second channel.
  • the second channel may be "CCTV-1".
  • the television 110 After the television 110 receives the video data of "CCTV-1”, it can play the video data of "CCTV-1".
  • the video screen 540 of the second channel (for example, "CCTV-1") may include The station logo of the second channel (for example, "CCTV-1" station logo 541).
  • the infrared control device 120 may support voice input.
  • the infrared control device 120 may be a device that supports voice input, such as a smart speaker.
  • the television 110 downloads the infrared code library and EPG data, it may send the infrared code library and EPG data to the infrared control device 120 for storage.
  • the infrared control device 120 can collect the user's voice signal, convert the voice signal into control instructions, and send an infrared control signal to the set-top box 140 through an infrared transmitter to control the set-top box 140 to complete operations such as switching the live channel (for example, switching to the second channel) .
  • the infrared control device 120 may collect the voice input by the user (for example, "Xiaoyi Xiaoyi, I want to watch CCTV-1").
  • the infrared control device 120 can parse the control instruction (for example, switch the live channel to "CCTV-1") from the voice input by the user.
  • the infrared control device 120 can determine the channel number (for example, "029") of the second channel (for example, "CCTV-1”) after switching from the channel list of the EPG data according to the control instruction.
  • the infrared control device 120 can determine the infrared code corresponding to the second channel (for example, "2x33") from the infrared code library according to the channel number of the second channel, and modulate the second channel according to the infrared code (for example, "2x33")
  • the infrared control signal corresponding to the channel, and the infrared control signal of the second channel is sent through the infrared transmitter.
  • the set-top box 140 After receiving the infrared control signal corresponding to the second channel, the set-top box 140 can obtain the video data of the second channel.
  • the embodiments shown in FIG. 5A to FIG. 5B which will not be repeated here.
  • the television 110 After the television 110 receives the video data of the second channel (for example, "CCTV-1"), it plays the video data of the second channel.
  • the second channel may be "CCTV-1".
  • the television 110 After the television 110 receives the video data of "CCTV-1”, it can play the video data of "CCTV-1".
  • the video screen 540 of the second channel (for example, "CCTV-1") may include The station logo of the second channel (for example, "CCTV-1" station logo 541).
  • the television 110 may enable the voice control function through a voice wake-up word, and the infrared control device 120 may also enable the voice control function through a voice wake-up word.
  • the television 110 may preferentially turn on the voice wake-up function, collect the user's voice signal, and execute the user's voice control instruction. In this way, the television 110 and the infrared control device 120 can be prevented from repeatedly executing the user's voice control instructions, and the power consumption of the infrared control device 120 can be saved.
  • the infrared control device 120 can obtain the voice wake-up words of the television 110.
  • the voice wake-up words of the infrared control device 120 are the same as the voice wake-up words of the television 110, the infrared control device 120
  • the control device 120 collects the voice wake-up word input by the user, it can send a wake-up request to the TV 110. If the TV 110 does not collect the voice wake-up word, the TV 110 can return confirmation to the infrared control device 120.
  • the infrared control device 120 can turn on the voice wake-up function, collect the user's voice, and execute the user's voice control instructions.
  • the TV 110 has collected the voice wake-up word
  • the TV 110 can turn on the voice wake-up function, collect the user's voice, and execute the voice control instruction.
  • the TV 110 when the TV 110 receives the user's voice input and simultaneously matches the video program of the live channel and when the video program is ordered, the TV 110 may preferentially return to the program of the live channel.
  • the voice content input by the user may be "Xiaoyi Xiaoyi, I want to watch running man”.
  • the TV 110 parses out the keyword "running man”, it can search the live channel currently playing the "running man” program from the EPG data, and at the same time, can search the on-demand video of the "running man” program from the network server.
  • the television 110 can control the set-top box 140 through the infrared control device 120 to switch to the live channel of the "running man” program. If there is no live channel currently playing the "Running Man” program, the television 110 may display a page that includes the on-demand video of the "Running Man” program. In this way, when the user searches for a program by voice, the television 110 preferentially returns matching live content to the user, which can improve the user's viewing experience.
  • the infrared control device 120 may be equipped with multiple infrared transmitters, so that the infrared control device 120 can emit infrared control signals in all directions. In this way, the user does not need to deliberately place the position and direction of the infrared control device 120, and only needs to place the infrared control device 120 near the set-top box 140 and ensure that no obstacles are blocked, so as to realize the remote control of the set-top box 140.
  • the infrared control device 120 may include 8 infrared transmitters, such as infrared transmitter 124A, infrared transmitter 124B, infrared transmitter 124C, infrared transmitter 124D, and infrared transmitter 124E.
  • the infrared control device 120 receives the infrared code sent by the television 110, it can modulate an infrared control signal according to the infrared code, and send it to the outside simultaneously through the eight infrared transmitters.
  • the set-top box 140 can receive the infrared control signal sent by the infrared control device 120 in any direction of the horizontal position of the infrared control device 120, which reduces the user's difficulty in placing the infrared control device 120 and the set-top box 140.
  • the infrared control device 120 may receive the power-on infrared code sent by the TV 110.
  • the infrared control device 120 can modulate the start-up infrared control signal according to the start-up infrared code, and send the start-up infrared control signal through different infrared transmitters in turn, until the set-top box 140 stops when the set-top box 140 is started.
  • the infrared control device 120 may determine the infrared transmitter used when the set-top box 140 is turned on as the main infrared transmitter.
  • the infrared control device 120 can only send infrared control signals through the main infrared transmitter, the set-top box 140 can be controlled and the power consumption of the infrared control device 120 can be saved.
  • the infrared control device 120 may include 8 infrared transmitters, such as infrared transmitter 124A, infrared transmitter 124B, infrared transmitter 124C, infrared transmitter 124D, and infrared transmitter 124E.
  • Infrared transmitter 124F infrared transmitter 124G, infrared transmitter 124H.
  • the infrared control device 120 receives the infrared code corresponding to the power-on instruction sent by the television 110, it can modulate the infrared control signal for power-on according to the infrared code corresponding to the power-on instruction.
  • the infrared control device 120 may first send the infrared control signal for booting through the infrared transmitter 124A.
  • the set-top box 140 can receive the infrared control signal for booting. In response to the infrared control signal for booting, the set-top box 140 is turned on, and sends and outputs a high-level signal to the television 110 through the HDMI line or the AV line. After the television 110 detects the high-level signal on the HDMI line or the AV line, it may return the control completion instruction to the infrared control device 120. After the infrared control device 120 receives the control completion instruction, it determines the infrared transmitter 124A as the master infrared transmitter.
  • the set-top box 140 cannot receive the infrared control signal for booting.
  • the television 110 does not send a completion instruction to the infrared control device 120 when it does not detect a high-level signal on the HDMI line or the AV line.
  • the infrared control device 120 does not receive the completion instruction sent by the television 110 within a period of time (for example, within 1 second), it can change to an infrared transmitter (for example, infrared transmitter 124B) to send the above infrared control signal for booting again until The completion instruction sent by the television 110 is received, and the main infrared transmitter is determined.
  • the infrared control device 120 may send an infrared control signal through the main infrared transmitter to control the set-top box 140. In this way, the power consumption of the infrared control device 120 is saved.
  • the television 110 may feed back the instruction information that the set-top box 140 has not responded to the infrared control device 120.
  • the infrared control device 120 receives the indication that the set-top box 140 is not responding, it can re-determine the new main infrared transmitter in the manner described above.
  • the television 110 may store respective infrared code libraries corresponding to the multiple devices.
  • the television 110 may receive a user's control instruction for a designated device (for example, the air conditioner 170) through the remote control 130, and determine the infrared code corresponding to the control instruction from the infrared code library corresponding to the designated device.
  • the television 110 may send the infrared code corresponding to the control instruction to the infrared control device 120.
  • the infrared control device 120 modulates the corresponding infrared control signal through the infrared code and sends it out.
  • the designated device for example, the air conditioner 170
  • receives the infrared control signal it can perform the operation corresponding to the infrared control signal. In this way, the user can control multiple devices through a remote control on the television, which provides convenience to the user.
  • the infrared control device 120 can remotely control multiple devices (such as a set-top box 140, an air conditioner 170, a washing machine 180, etc.) through infrared rays.
  • the television 110 may display a device selection interface 1010.
  • the device selection interface 1010 includes multiple device options (for example, a set-top box option 1011, an air conditioner option 1012, a washing machine option 1013, etc.) and a selection box 1014.
  • the television 110 may display the homepage application interface 410 shown in FIG. 4A above.
  • the television 110 may display the washing machine control interface corresponding to the washing machine 180 for controlling the washing machine.
  • the TV 110 may receive the user's selection input for the air conditioning option 1012 through the remote control 130. In response to the selection input for the air conditioning option 1012, the TV 110 may display an air conditioning control interface 1020 as shown in FIG. 10B.
  • the air conditioning control interface 1020 may include a power switch 1021, a working mode 1022 (such as automatic mode, cooling mode, heating mode, ventilation mode and dehumidification mode, etc.), and a wind speed option 1023 (such as automatic wind speed). Options, high wind speed options, medium wind speed options, small wind speed options, etc.), other options 1024 (for example, healthy options, strong options), setting temperature control 1025, sleep time input box 1026, and input box 1027, etc.
  • a power switch 1021 such as automatic mode, cooling mode, heating mode, ventilation mode and dehumidification mode, etc.
  • a working mode 1022 such as automatic mode, cooling mode, heating mode, ventilation mode and dehumidification mode, etc.
  • a wind speed option 1023 such as automatic wind speed.
  • other options 1024 for example, healthy options, strong options
  • setting temperature control 1025 sleep time input box 1026, and input box 1027, etc.
  • the TV 110 When the TV 110 receives the user's selection input for the automatic wind speed option through the remote control 130 (for example, the input box 1027 is moved to the automatic wind speed option through the direction keys on the remote control 130, and then the confirm key 133E is pressed), the TV 110
  • the infrared code corresponding to the automatic wind speed option may be sent to the infrared control device 120.
  • the infrared control device 120 After receiving the infrared code corresponding to the automatic wind speed option, the infrared control device 120 can modulate an infrared control signal according to the infrared code, and send the infrared control signal to the outside through an infrared transmitter.
  • the air conditioner 170 can parse the infrared code corresponding to the automatic wind speed option from the infrared control signal, thereby executing the control command corresponding to the infrared code, that is, setting the wind speed to the automatic wind speed.
  • the respective infrared code libraries corresponding to the devices that support infrared remote control can also be stored on the infrared control device 120, and the television 110 receives the user input for the specified device (for example, the air conditioner 170) through the remote control 130.
  • the control instruction corresponding to the control operation can be sent to the infrared control device 120.
  • the infrared control device 120 can determine the infrared code corresponding to the control instruction from the infrared code library corresponding to the designated device according to the control instruction.
  • the infrared control device 120 can modulate an infrared control signal according to the infrared code and radiate it outward.
  • the designated device for example, the air conditioner 170
  • the air conditioner 170 after receiving the infrared control signal, can parse out the control instruction and execute the control instruction.

Abstract

The present application discloses a control method for a set top box. Said method comprises: first, a remote controller sending, in response to a selection operation of a user for a first channel, a first control instruction to a television; then, after receiving the first control instruction, the television sending to an infrared control device a first infrared code corresponding to the first channel; next, after receiving the first infrared code, the infrared control device sending the first infrared code to the set top box by means of infrared rays; thereafter, the set top box acquiring, after receiving the first infrared code, video data of the first channel, and sending the video data of the first channel to the television; and finally, the television playing back the video data of the first channel. In this way, a user controls a television and a set top box simultaneously simply by means of a television remote controller, reducing the user's operation steps.

Description

一种机顶盒的控制方法、系统及相关装置Control method, system and related device of set-top box
本申请要求于2019年06月27日提交中国专利局、申请号为201910570554.8、申请名称为“一种机顶盒的控制方法、系统及相关装置”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims the priority of a Chinese patent application filed with the Chinese Patent Office on June 27, 2019, the application number is 201910570554.8, and the application name is "a control method, system and related device for a set-top box", the entire content of which is incorporated by reference In this application.
技术领域Technical field
本申请涉及通信技术领域,尤其涉及一种机顶盒的控制方法、系统及相关装置。This application relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular to a control method, system and related devices of a set-top box.
背景技术Background technique
随着有线数字电视的不断普及,用户在电视上都配置了机顶盒(set top box,STB)用以接收、解析和播放广播电视直播节目。当前,电视上也会安装有一定的视频应用,用户可以通过电视自带的视频应用,观看因特网上的一些点播视频资源。With the continuous popularization of cable digital TV, users have configured a set top box (STB) on the TV to receive, analyze, and play broadcast and TV live programs. Currently, certain video applications are also installed on the TV, and users can watch some on-demand video resources on the Internet through the video application that comes with the TV.
目前,用户在需要观看机顶盒的直播节目时,需要先利用电视机遥控器进入电视机的信号源选择界面,选择对应的机顶盒设备。在选择机顶盒设备作为信号源之后,用户需要利用机顶盒遥控器,通过红外遥控信号,控制机顶盒完成直播节目的换台等操作。这样,通过两个遥控器分别对电视机和机顶盒进行控制,操作过程繁琐。At present, when a user needs to watch a live program of a set-top box, he needs to use the TV remote control to enter the signal source selection interface of the TV and select the corresponding set-top box device. After selecting the set-top box device as the signal source, the user needs to use the set-top box remote control to control the set-top box to complete operations such as channel switching of live programs through infrared remote control signals. In this way, the television and the set-top box are respectively controlled by two remote controllers, and the operation process is complicated.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本申请提供了一种机顶盒的控制方法、系统及相关装置,可以实现用户只通过电视遥控器,对电视和机顶盒同时进行控制,减少了用户的操作步骤。The present application provides a control method, system and related device for a set-top box, which can realize that the user can control the TV and the set-top box at the same time only through the TV remote control, thereby reducing the operation steps of the user.
第一方面,本申请提供了一种机顶盒的控制方法,包括:首先,遥控器响应于用户针对第一频道的选择操作,向电视机发送第一控制指令。然后,电视机在接收到第一控制指令后,向红外控制设备发送第一频道对应的第一红外码。接着,红外控制设备在接收到第一红外码后,将第一红外码通过红外线发送给机顶盒。接着,机顶盒在接收到第一红外码后,获取第一频道的视频数据,并将第一频道的视频数据发送给电视机。最后,电视机播放第一频道的视频数据。In a first aspect, the present application provides a method for controlling a set-top box, including: first, the remote controller sends a first control instruction to the television in response to a user's selection operation on the first channel. Then, after receiving the first control instruction, the television sends the first infrared code corresponding to the first channel to the infrared control device. Then, after receiving the first infrared code, the infrared control device sends the first infrared code to the set-top box via infrared. Then, after receiving the first infrared code, the set-top box obtains the video data of the first channel, and sends the video data of the first channel to the television. Finally, the TV plays the video data of the first channel.
通过本申请提供的一种机顶盒控制方法,当电视机通过遥控器接收到用户针对机顶盒输入的操作指令时,电视机可以将该操作指令对应的红外码发送给红外控制设备,红外控制设备在接收到红外码之后,可以发送该操作指令对应的红外控制信号给机顶盒。机顶盒在接收到该红外控制信号之后,可以执行该操作指令。这样,可以实现用户只需在单个遥控器上输入操作指令,就能完成对机顶盒和电视的控制。并且,即使机顶盒和电视机相对于遥控器而言在不同的方向上,也不需要用户在输入操作指令时,刻意的将遥控器对准某一个方向,实现了遥控器在任一方向上,都能对电视机和机顶盒进行控制。简化了用户的操作过程,提高了用户体验。Through the set-top box control method provided by this application, when the television receives an operation instruction input by the user for the set-top box through the remote control, the television can send the infrared code corresponding to the operation instruction to the infrared control device, and the infrared control device is receiving After reaching the infrared code, the infrared control signal corresponding to the operation instruction can be sent to the set-top box. After receiving the infrared control signal, the set-top box can execute the operation instruction. In this way, it can be realized that the user only needs to input operation instructions on a single remote control to complete the control of the set-top box and the TV. Moreover, even if the set-top box and the TV are in different directions relative to the remote control, there is no need for the user to deliberately point the remote control in a certain direction when inputting operating instructions, so that the remote control can be in any direction. Control the TV and set-top box. Simplifies the user's operation process and improves the user experience.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在遥控器响应于用户针对第一频道的选择操作,向电视机发送第一控制指令之前,该方法还包括:当电视机与机顶盒同时处于待机状态时,遥控器响应于用户针对电视机的开机操作,向电视机发送第二控制指令,用于指示电视机和机顶盒切换至开机状态。然后,电视机在接收到第二控制指令后,切换至开机状态并向红外控 制设备发送第二控制指令对应的第二红外码。接着,红外控制设备在接收第二红外码后,将第二红外码通过红外线发送给机顶盒。最后,机顶盒在接收到第二红外码后,切换至开机状态。这样,用户只需利用一个遥控器就可以同时遥控电视机和机顶盒开机,简化了用户的操作。In a possible implementation manner, before the remote controller sends the first control instruction to the television in response to the user's selection operation of the first channel, the method further includes: when the television and the set-top box are in standby at the same time, the remote control In response to the user's power-on operation of the TV, the device sends a second control instruction to the TV to instruct the TV and the set-top box to switch to the power-on state. Then, after the television receives the second control instruction, it switches to the power-on state and sends the second infrared code corresponding to the second control instruction to the infrared control device. Then, after receiving the second infrared code, the infrared control device sends the second infrared code to the set-top box via infrared. Finally, after receiving the second infrared code, the set-top box switches to the power-on state. In this way, the user can remotely control the TV and the set-top box to turn on at the same time with only one remote control, which simplifies the user's operation.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:首先,当电视机与机顶盒同时处于开机状态时,遥控器响应于用户针对电视机的待机操作,向电视机发送第三控制指令,用于指示电视机和机顶盒切换至待机状态。然后,电视机在接收到第三控制指令后,切换至待机状态并向红外控制设备发送第三控制指令对应的第三红外码。接着,红外控制设备在接收第三红外码后,将第三红外码通过红外线发送给机顶盒。最后,机顶盒在接收到第三红外码后,切换至待机状态。这样,用户只需利用一个遥控器就可以同时遥控电视机和机顶盒进行待机,简化了用户的操作。In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: first, when the TV and the set-top box are in the on state at the same time, the remote control sends a third control instruction to the TV in response to the user's standby operation on the TV. Instruct the TV and set-top box to switch to standby. Then, after the television receives the third control instruction, it switches to the standby state and sends the third infrared code corresponding to the third control instruction to the infrared control device. Next, after receiving the third infrared code, the infrared control device sends the third infrared code to the set-top box via infrared. Finally, after receiving the third infrared code, the set-top box switches to the standby state. In this way, the user only needs to use one remote control to control the TV and the set-top box in standby at the same time, which simplifies the user's operation.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:首先,在电视机播放第一频道的视频数据时,遥控器响应于用户的切换至第二频道的操作,向电视机发送第四控制指令。然后,电视机在接收到第四控制指令后,确定第二频道的频道号对应的第四红外码,并向红外控制设备发送第四红外码。接着,红外控制设备在接收到第四红外码后,将第四红外码通过红外线发送给机顶盒。接着,机顶盒在接收到所述第四红外码后,获取第二频道的视频数据,并将所述第二频道的视频数据发送给所述电视机。最后,电视机播放所述第二频道的视频数据。这样,用户可以在通过与电视机相连接的遥控器遥控机顶盒切台,实现了一个遥控器同时控制电视机和机顶盒,简化了用户的操作。In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: firstly, when the TV is playing the video data of the first channel, the remote control sends a fourth control instruction to the TV in response to the user's operation of switching to the second channel . Then, after receiving the fourth control instruction, the television determines the fourth infrared code corresponding to the channel number of the second channel, and sends the fourth infrared code to the infrared control device. Then, after receiving the fourth infrared code, the infrared control device sends the fourth infrared code to the set-top box via infrared. Then, after receiving the fourth infrared code, the set-top box obtains the video data of the second channel, and sends the video data of the second channel to the television. Finally, the TV plays the video data of the second channel. In this way, the user can remotely control the set-top box through the remote control connected with the TV to cut the station, realize that a remote control can control the TV and the set-top box at the same time, simplifying the user's operation.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:首先,在电视机播放第一频道的视频数据时,遥控器响应于用户的切换至第二频道的操作,向电视机发送第四控制指令。然后,电视机在接收到第四控制指令后,向红外控制设备发送第四控制指令对应的第五红外码。接着,红外控制设备在接收到第五红外码后,将第五红外码通过红外线发送给机顶盒。再接着,机顶盒在接收到所述第五红外码后,根据第五红外码和所述第一频道的频道号,确定出第二频道的频道号。再接着,机顶盒根据第二频道的频道号,获取第二频道的视频数据,并将第二频道的视频数据发送给电视机。最后,电视机播放第二频道的视频数据。这样,用户可以在通过与电视机相连接的遥控器遥控机顶盒切台,实现了一个遥控器同时控制电视机和机顶盒,简化了用户的操作。In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: firstly, when the TV is playing the video data of the first channel, the remote control sends a fourth control instruction to the TV in response to the user's operation of switching to the second channel . Then, after receiving the fourth control instruction, the television sends the fifth infrared code corresponding to the fourth control instruction to the infrared control device. Then, after receiving the fifth infrared code, the infrared control device sends the fifth infrared code to the set-top box via infrared. Then, after receiving the fifth infrared code, the set-top box determines the channel number of the second channel according to the fifth infrared code and the channel number of the first channel. Then, the set-top box obtains the video data of the second channel according to the channel number of the second channel, and sends the video data of the second channel to the TV. Finally, the TV plays the video data of the second channel. In this way, the user can remotely control the set-top box through the remote control connected with the TV to cut the station, realize that a remote control can control the TV and the set-top box at the same time, simplifying the user's operation.
第二方面,本申请提供另了一种机顶盒的控制方法,包括:首先,遥控器响应于用户针对第一频道的选择操作,向电视机发送第一控制指令。然后,电视机在接收到第一控制指令后,向红外控制设备发送第一频道对应的第一红外码。接着,红外控制设备在接收第一红外码后,将第一红外码通过红外线发送给机顶盒。其中,所述第一红外码用于指示所述机顶盒获取第一频道的视频数据,并将所述第一频道的视频数据发送给所述电视机。最后,所述电视机播放所述第一频道的视频数据。In a second aspect, the present application provides another set-top box control method, including: first, the remote controller sends a first control instruction to the television in response to a user's selection operation of the first channel. Then, after receiving the first control instruction, the television sends the first infrared code corresponding to the first channel to the infrared control device. Then, after receiving the first infrared code, the infrared control device sends the first infrared code to the set-top box via infrared. Wherein, the first infrared code is used to instruct the set-top box to obtain the video data of the first channel, and send the video data of the first channel to the television. Finally, the television plays the video data of the first channel.
通过本申请提供的一种机顶盒控制方法,当电视机通过遥控器接收到用户针对机顶盒输入的操作指令时,电视机可以将该操作指令对应的红外码发送给红外控制设备,红外控制设备在接收到红外码之后,可以发送该操作指令对应的红外控制信号给机顶盒。机顶盒 在接收到该红外控制信号之后,可以执行该操作指令。这样,可以实现用户只需在单个遥控器上输入操作指令,就能完成对机顶盒和电视的控制。并且,即使机顶盒和电视机相对于遥控器而言在不同的方向上,也不需要用户在输入操作指令时,刻意的将遥控器对准某一个方向,实现了遥控器在任一方向上,都能对电视机和机顶盒进行控制。简化了用户的操作过程,提高了用户体验。Through the set-top box control method provided by this application, when the television receives an operation instruction input by the user for the set-top box through the remote control, the television can send the infrared code corresponding to the operation instruction to the infrared control device, and the infrared control device is receiving After reaching the infrared code, the infrared control signal corresponding to the operation instruction can be sent to the set-top box. After receiving the infrared control signal, the set-top box can execute the operation instruction. In this way, it can be realized that the user only needs to input operation instructions on a single remote control to complete the control of the set-top box and the TV. Moreover, even if the set-top box and the TV are in different directions relative to the remote control, there is no need for the user to deliberately point the remote control in a certain direction when inputting operating instructions, so that the remote control can be in any direction. Control the TV and set-top box. Simplifies the user's operation process and improves the user experience.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在遥控器响应于用户针对第一频道的选择操作,向电视机发送第一控制指令之前,该方法还包括:首先,当电视机与机顶盒同时处于待机状态时,遥控器响应于用户针对电视机的开机操作,向电视机发送第二控制指令,用于指示电视机和机顶盒切换至开机状态。然后,电视机在接收到第二控制指令后,切换至开机状态并向红外控制设备发送第二控制指令对应的第二红外码。接着,红外控制设备在接收第二红外码后,将第二红外码通过红外线发送给机顶盒。其中,第二红外码用于指示机顶盒开机。这样,用户只需利用一个遥控器就可以同时遥控电视机和机顶盒开机,简化了用户的操作。In a possible implementation manner, before the remote controller sends the first control instruction to the TV in response to the user's selection operation of the first channel, the method further includes: first, when the TV and the set-top box are in a standby state at the same time , The remote control sends a second control instruction to the television in response to the user's power-on operation of the television, for instructing the television and the set-top box to switch to the on state. Then, after the television receives the second control instruction, it switches to the power-on state and sends the second infrared code corresponding to the second control instruction to the infrared control device. Then, after receiving the second infrared code, the infrared control device sends the second infrared code to the set-top box via infrared. Among them, the second infrared code is used to instruct the set-top box to turn on. In this way, the user can remotely control the TV and the set-top box to turn on at the same time with only one remote control, which simplifies the user's operation.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:首先,当电视机与机顶盒同时处于开机状态时,遥控器响应于用户针对电视机的待机操作,向电视机发送第三控制指令,用于指示电视机和机顶盒切换至待机状态。然后,电视机在接收到第三控制指令后,切换至待机状态并向红外控制设备发送第三控制指令对应的第三红外码。接着,红外控制设备在接收第三红外码后,将第三红外码通过红外线发送给机顶盒。其中,第三红外码用于指示机顶盒切换至待机状态。这样,用户只需利用一个遥控器就可以同时遥控电视机和机顶盒进行待机,简化了用户的操作。In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: first, when the TV and the set-top box are in the on state at the same time, the remote control sends a third control instruction to the TV in response to the user's standby operation on the TV. Instruct the TV and set-top box to switch to standby. Then, after the television receives the third control instruction, it switches to the standby state and sends the third infrared code corresponding to the third control instruction to the infrared control device. Next, after receiving the third infrared code, the infrared control device sends the third infrared code to the set-top box via infrared. Among them, the third infrared code is used to instruct the set-top box to switch to the standby state. In this way, the user only needs to use one remote control to control the TV and the set-top box in standby at the same time, which simplifies the user's operation.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:首先,在电视机播放第一频道的视频数据时,遥控器响应于用户的切台至第二频道的操作,向电视机发送第四控制指令。然后,电视机在接收到第四控制指令后,确定第二频道的频道号对应的第四红外码,并通过第二传输方式向红外控制设备发送第四红外码。接着,红外控制设备在接收到第四红外码后,将第四红外码通过红外线发送给机顶盒。其中,第四红外码用于指示机顶盒获取第二频道的视频数据,并将第二频道的视频数据发送给电视机。最后,电视机播放第二频道的视频数据。这样,用户可以在通过与电视机相连接的遥控器遥控机顶盒切台,实现了一个遥控器同时控制电视机和机顶盒,简化了用户的操作。In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: firstly, when the television is playing the video data of the first channel, the remote control sends a fourth control to the television in response to the user's operation of switching to the second channel. instruction. Then, after receiving the fourth control instruction, the television determines the fourth infrared code corresponding to the channel number of the second channel, and sends the fourth infrared code to the infrared control device through the second transmission mode. Then, after receiving the fourth infrared code, the infrared control device sends the fourth infrared code to the set-top box via infrared. Among them, the fourth infrared code is used to instruct the set-top box to obtain the video data of the second channel and send the video data of the second channel to the TV. Finally, the TV plays the video data of the second channel. In this way, the user can remotely control the set-top box through the remote control connected with the TV to cut the station, realize that a remote control can control the TV and the set-top box at the same time, simplifying the user's operation.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:首先,在电视机播放第一频道的视频数据时,遥控器响应于用户的切台至第二频道的操作,向电视机发送第四控制指令。然后,电视机在接收到第四控制指令后,向红外控制设备发送第四控制指令对应的第五红外码。接着,红外控制设备在接收到第五红外码后,将第五红外码通过红外线发送给机顶盒。其中,第五红外码用于指示机顶盒根据第五红外码和第一频道的频道号,确定出第二频道的频道号,并根据所述第二频道的频道号,获取第二频道的视频数据,并发送给电视机。最后,电视机播放所述第二频道的视频数据。这样,用户可以在通过与电视机相连接的遥控器遥控机顶盒切台,实现了一个遥控器同时控制电视机和机顶盒,简化了用户的操作。In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: firstly, when the television is playing the video data of the first channel, the remote control sends a fourth control to the television in response to the user's operation of switching to the second channel. instruction. Then, after receiving the fourth control instruction, the television sends the fifth infrared code corresponding to the fourth control instruction to the infrared control device. Then, after receiving the fifth infrared code, the infrared control device sends the fifth infrared code to the set-top box via infrared. Wherein, the fifth infrared code is used to instruct the set-top box to determine the channel number of the second channel according to the fifth infrared code and the channel number of the first channel, and obtain the video data of the second channel according to the channel number of the second channel , And send it to the TV. Finally, the TV plays the video data of the second channel. In this way, the user can remotely control the set-top box through the remote control connected with the TV to cut the station, realize that a remote control can control the TV and the set-top box at the same time, simplifying the user's operation.
第三方面,本申请提供了一种机顶盒的控制方法,包括:首先,电视机接收遥控器在响应于针对第一频道的选择操作时发送的第一控制指令。然后,电视机向红外控制设备发 送第一频道对应的第一红外码。接着,红外控制设备在接收到第一红外码后,将第一红外码通过红外线发送给机顶盒。其中,第一红外码用于指示机顶盒获取第一频道的视频数据,并将第一频道的视频数据发送至电视机上播放。In a third aspect, the present application provides a method for controlling a set-top box, including: first, the television receives a first control instruction sent by a remote controller in response to a selection operation for a first channel. Then, the TV sends the first infrared code corresponding to the first channel to the infrared control device. Then, after receiving the first infrared code, the infrared control device sends the first infrared code to the set-top box via infrared. The first infrared code is used to instruct the set-top box to obtain the video data of the first channel and send the video data of the first channel to the TV for playing.
通过本申请提供的一种机顶盒控制方法,当电视机通过遥控器接收到用户针对机顶盒输入的操作指令时,电视机可以将该操作指令对应的红外码发送给红外控制设备,红外控制设备在接收到红外码之后,可以发送该操作指令对应的红外控制信号给机顶盒。机顶盒在接收到该红外控制信号之后,可以执行该操作指令。这样,可以实现用户只需在单个遥控器上输入操作指令,就能完成对机顶盒和电视的控制。并且,即使机顶盒和电视机相对于遥控器而言在不同的方向上,也不需要用户在输入操作指令时,刻意的将遥控器对准某一个方向,实现了遥控器在任一方向上,都能对电视机和机顶盒进行控制。简化了用户的操作过程,提高了用户体验。Through the set-top box control method provided by this application, when the television receives an operation instruction input by the user for the set-top box through the remote control, the television can send the infrared code corresponding to the operation instruction to the infrared control device, and the infrared control device is receiving After reaching the infrared code, the infrared control signal corresponding to the operation instruction can be sent to the set-top box. After receiving the infrared control signal, the set-top box can execute the operation instruction. In this way, it can be realized that the user only needs to input operation instructions on a single remote control to complete the control of the set-top box and the TV. Moreover, even if the set-top box and the TV are in different directions relative to the remote control, there is no need for the user to deliberately point the remote control in a certain direction when inputting operating instructions, so that the remote control can be in any direction. Control the TV and set-top box. Simplifies the user's operation process and improves the user experience.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在电视机接收遥控器在响应于针对第一频道的选择操作时发送的第一控制指令之前,该方法还包括:首先,当电视机与机顶盒同时处于待机状态时,电视机接收遥控器响应于针对电视机的开机操作时所发送的第二控制指令,用于指示电视机和机顶盒切换至开机状态。然后,电视机开机并向红外控制设备发送第二控制指令对应的第二红外码。接着,红外控制设备在接收第二红外码后,将第二红外码通过红外线发送给机顶盒。其中,第一红外码用于指示机顶盒开机。这样,用户只需利用一个遥控器就可以同时遥控电视机和机顶盒开机,简化了用户的操作。In a possible implementation manner, before the television receives the first control instruction sent by the remote controller in response to the selection operation of the first channel, the method further includes: first, when the television and the set-top box are in a standby state at the same time When the TV receives the second control instruction sent by the remote controller in response to the power-on operation of the TV, the second control instruction is used to instruct the TV and the set-top box to switch to the power-on state. Then, the television is turned on and sends the second infrared code corresponding to the second control instruction to the infrared control device. Then, after receiving the second infrared code, the infrared control device sends the second infrared code to the set-top box via infrared. Among them, the first infrared code is used to instruct the set-top box to turn on. In this way, the user can remotely control the TV and the set-top box to turn on at the same time with only one remote control, which simplifies the user's operation.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:首先,当电视机与机顶盒同时处于开机状态时,电视机接收遥控器响应于针对电视机的待机操作所发送的第三控制指令,用于指示电视机和机顶盒切换至待机状态。然后,电视机切换至待机状态并向红外控制设备发送第三控制指令对应的第三红外码。最后,红外控制设备在接收第三红外码后,将第三红外码通过红外线发送给机顶盒。其中,第三红外码用于指示机顶盒切换至待机状态。这样,用户只需利用一个遥控器就可以同时遥控电视机和机顶盒进行待机,简化了用户的操作。In a possible implementation, the method further includes: first, when the television and the set-top box are both in the on state, the television receives the third control instruction sent by the remote controller in response to the standby operation of the television for Instruct the TV and set-top box to switch to standby. Then, the television is switched to the standby state and sends the third infrared code corresponding to the third control instruction to the infrared control device. Finally, after receiving the third infrared code, the infrared control device sends the third infrared code to the set-top box via infrared. Among them, the third infrared code is used to instruct the set-top box to switch to the standby state. In this way, the user only needs to use one remote control to control the TV and the set-top box in standby at the same time, which simplifies the user's operation.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:首先,在电视机播放第一频道的视频数据时,电视机接收遥控器响应于切台至第二频道的操作所发送的第四控制指令。然后,电视机确定第二频道的频道号对应的第四红外码,并向红外控制设备发送第四红外码。接着,红外控制设备在接收到第四红外码后,将第四红外码通过红外线发送给机顶盒。其中,第四红外码用于指示机顶盒获取第二频道的视频数据,并将第二频道的视频数据发送至电视机上播放。这样,用户可以在通过与电视机相连接的遥控器遥控机顶盒切台,实现了一个遥控器同时控制电视机和机顶盒,简化了用户的操作。In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: first, when the television plays the video data of the first channel, the television receives a fourth control instruction sent by the remote controller in response to the operation of switching to the second channel . Then, the television determines the fourth infrared code corresponding to the channel number of the second channel, and sends the fourth infrared code to the infrared control device. Then, after receiving the fourth infrared code, the infrared control device sends the fourth infrared code to the set-top box via infrared. Among them, the fourth infrared code is used to instruct the set-top box to obtain the video data of the second channel, and send the video data of the second channel to the TV for playing. In this way, the user can remotely control the set-top box through the remote control connected with the TV to cut the station, realize that a remote control can control the TV and the set-top box at the same time, simplifying the user's operation.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:首先,在电视机播放第一频道的视频数据时,电视机接收遥控器响应于切台至第二频道的操作所发送的第四控制指令。然后,电视机在接收到第四控制指令后,向红外控制设备发送第四控制指令对应的第五红外码。接着,红外控制设备在接收到第五红外码后,将第五红外码通过红外线发送给机顶盒。其中,第五红外码用于指示机顶盒根据第五红外码和第一频道的频道号,确定出第二频道的频道号,并根据第二频道的频道号,获取第二频道的视频数据,并发送至电视机上播放。这样,用户可以在通过与电视机相连接的遥控器遥控机顶盒切台,实现了一个遥控器同时控制电视 机和机顶盒,简化了用户的操作。In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: first, when the television plays the video data of the first channel, the television receives a fourth control instruction sent by the remote controller in response to the operation of switching to the second channel . Then, after receiving the fourth control instruction, the television sends the fifth infrared code corresponding to the fourth control instruction to the infrared control device. Then, after receiving the fifth infrared code, the infrared control device sends the fifth infrared code to the set-top box via infrared. Among them, the fifth infrared code is used to instruct the set-top box to determine the channel number of the second channel according to the fifth infrared code and the channel number of the first channel, and obtain the video data of the second channel according to the channel number of the second channel, and Send it to the TV for playback. In this way, the user can remotely control the set-top box through the remote control connected to the TV to cut the station, realize that a remote control can control the TV and the set-top box at the same time, which simplifies the user's operation.
第四方面,本申请提供了一种系统,该系统包括:遥控器、电视机、红外控制设备、机顶盒。其中:遥控器,用于响应于用户针对第一频道的选择操作,向电视机发送第一控制指令。电视机,用于在接收到第一控制指令后,向红外控制设备发送第一频道对应的第一红外码。红外控制设备,用于在接收到第一红外码后,将第一红外码通过红外线发送给机顶盒。机顶盒,用于在接收到第一红外码后,获取第一频道的视频数据,并将第一频道的视频数据发送电视机。电视机,用于播放第一频道的视频数据。In a fourth aspect, this application provides a system, which includes: a remote control, a television, an infrared control device, and a set-top box. Wherein: the remote control is used to send a first control instruction to the television in response to the user's selection operation on the first channel. The television is used for sending the first infrared code corresponding to the first channel to the infrared control device after receiving the first control instruction. The infrared control device is used to send the first infrared code to the set-top box via infrared after receiving the first infrared code. The set-top box is used to obtain the video data of the first channel after receiving the first infrared code, and send the video data of the first channel to the TV. The TV set is used to play the video data of the first channel.
通过本申请提供的一种系统,当电视机通过遥控器接收到用户针对机顶盒输入的操作指令时,电视机可以将该操作指令对应的红外码发送给红外控制设备,红外控制设备在接收到红外码之后,可以发送该操作指令对应的红外控制信号给机顶盒。机顶盒在接收到该红外控制信号之后,可以执行该操作指令。这样,可以实现用户只需在单个遥控器上输入操作指令,就能完成对机顶盒和电视的控制。并且,即使机顶盒和电视机相对于遥控器而言在不同的方向上,也不需要用户在输入操作指令时,刻意的将遥控器对准某一个方向,实现了遥控器在任一方向上,都能对电视机和机顶盒进行控制。简化了用户的操作过程,提高了用户体验。Through the system provided by this application, when the TV receives an operation instruction input by the user for the set-top box through the remote control, the TV can send the infrared code corresponding to the operation instruction to the infrared control device, and the infrared control device receives the infrared After the code, the infrared control signal corresponding to the operation instruction can be sent to the set-top box. After receiving the infrared control signal, the set-top box can execute the operation instruction. In this way, it can be realized that the user only needs to input operation instructions on a single remote control to complete the control of the set-top box and the TV. Moreover, even if the set-top box and the TV are in different directions relative to the remote control, there is no need for the user to deliberately point the remote control in a certain direction when inputting operating instructions, so that the remote control can be in any direction. Control the TV and set-top box. Simplifies the user's operation process and improves the user experience.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在遥控器响应于用户针对第一频道的选择操作,向电视机发送第一控制指令之前,当电视机与机顶盒同时处于待机状态时:遥控器,还用于响应于用户针对电视机的开机操作,向电视机发送第二控制指令。其中,该第二控制指令用于指示电视机和机顶盒切换至开机状态。电视机,还用于在接收到第二控制指令后,切换至开机状态并向红外控制设备发送第二控制指令对应的第二红外码。红外控制设备,还用于在接收第二红外码后,将第二红外码通过红外线发送给机顶盒。机顶盒还用于在接收到第二红外码后,切换至开机状态。这样,用户只需利用一个遥控器就可以同时遥控电视机和机顶盒开机,简化了用户的操作。In a possible implementation, before the remote control sends the first control instruction to the TV in response to the user's selection operation of the first channel, when the TV and the set-top box are in standby at the same time: the remote control is also used for In response to the user's power-on operation of the TV, a second control instruction is sent to the TV. Wherein, the second control instruction is used to instruct the television and the set-top box to switch to the on state. The television is also used to switch to the on state after receiving the second control instruction and send the second infrared code corresponding to the second control instruction to the infrared control device. The infrared control device is also used to send the second infrared code to the set-top box via infrared after receiving the second infrared code. The set-top box is also used to switch to the power-on state after receiving the second infrared code. In this way, the user can remotely control the TV and the set-top box to turn on at the same time with only one remote control, which simplifies the user's operation.
在一种可能的实现方式中,当电视机与机顶盒同时处于开机状态时:遥控器,还用于响应于用户针对电视机的待机操作,向电视机发送第三控制指令,用于指示电视机和机顶盒切换至待机状态。电视机,还用于在接收到第三控制指令后,切换至待机状态并向红外控制设备发送第三控制指令对应的第三红外码。红外控制设备,还用于在接收第三红外码后,将第三红外码通过红外线发送给机顶盒。机顶盒,还用于在接收到第三红外码后,切换至待机状态。这样,用户只需利用一个遥控器就可以同时遥控电视机和机顶盒进行待机,简化了用户的操作。In a possible implementation, when the TV and the set-top box are in the on state at the same time: the remote control is also used to send a third control instruction to the TV in response to the user's standby operation on the TV, for instructing the TV And the set-top box switches to standby. The television is also used to switch to the standby state after receiving the third control instruction and send the third infrared code corresponding to the third control instruction to the infrared control device. The infrared control device is also used to send the third infrared code to the set-top box via infrared after receiving the third infrared code. The set-top box is also used to switch to the standby state after receiving the third infrared code. In this way, the user only needs to use one remote control to control the TV and the set-top box in standby at the same time, which simplifies the user's operation.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在电视机播放第一频道的视频数据时,遥控器,还用于响应于用户的切换至第二频道的操作,向电视机发送第四控制指令。电视机,还用于在接收到第四控制指令后,确定第二频道的频道号对应的第四红外码,并向红外控制设备发送第四红外码。红外控制设备,还用于在接收到第四红外码后,将第四红外码通过红外线发送给机顶盒。机顶盒,还用于在接收到第四红外码后,获取第二频道的视频数据,并将第二频道的视频数据发送给电视机。电视机,还用于播放第二频道的视频数据。这样,用户可以在通过与电视机相连接的遥控器遥控机顶盒切台,实现了一个遥控器同时控制电视机和 机顶盒,简化了用户的操作。In a possible implementation manner, when the TV plays the video data of the first channel, the remote control is also used to send a fourth control instruction to the TV in response to the user's operation of switching to the second channel. The television is also used to determine the fourth infrared code corresponding to the channel number of the second channel after receiving the fourth control instruction, and send the fourth infrared code to the infrared control device. The infrared control device is also used to send the fourth infrared code to the set-top box via infrared after receiving the fourth infrared code. The set-top box is also used to obtain the video data of the second channel after receiving the fourth infrared code, and send the video data of the second channel to the TV. The TV is also used to play the video data of the second channel. In this way, the user can remotely control the set-top box through the remote control connected to the TV to cut the station, realize that a remote control can control the TV and the set-top box at the same time, which simplifies the user's operation.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:在电视机播放第一频道的视频数据时,遥控器,还用于响应于用户的切换至第二频道的操作,向电视机发送第四控制指令。电视机,还用于在接收到第四控制指令后,向红外控制设备发送第四控制指令对应的第五红外码。红外控制设备,还用于在接收到第五红外码后,将第五红外码通过红外线发送给机顶盒。机顶盒,还用于在接收到所述第五红外码后,根据第五红外码和所述第一频道的频道号,确定出第二频道的频道号。机顶盒,还用于根据第二频道的频道号,获取第二频道的视频数据,并将第二频道的视频数据发送给电视机。电视机,还用于播放第二频道的视频数据。这样,用户可以在通过与电视机相连接的遥控器遥控机顶盒切台,实现了一个遥控器同时控制电视机和机顶盒,简化了用户的操作。In a possible implementation, the method further includes: when the TV is playing the video data of the first channel, the remote control is also used to send the fourth channel to the TV in response to the user's operation of switching to the second channel. Control instruction. The television is also used to send the fifth infrared code corresponding to the fourth control instruction to the infrared control device after receiving the fourth control instruction. The infrared control device is also used to send the fifth infrared code to the set-top box via infrared after receiving the fifth infrared code. The set-top box is further configured to determine the channel number of the second channel according to the fifth infrared code and the channel number of the first channel after receiving the fifth infrared code. The set-top box is also used to obtain the video data of the second channel according to the channel number of the second channel, and send the video data of the second channel to the TV. The TV is also used to play the video data of the second channel. In this way, the user can remotely control the set-top box through the remote control connected with the TV to cut the station, realize that a remote control can control the TV and the set-top box at the same time, simplifying the user's operation.
第五方面,本申请提供了一种系统,该系统包括:遥控器、电视机和红外控制设备。其中:遥控器,用于响应于用户针对第一频道的选择操作,向电视机发送第一控制指令。电视机,用于在接收到第一控制指令后,向红外控制设备发送第一频道对应的第一红外码。红外控制设备,用于在接收到第一红外码后,将第一红外码通过红外线发送给机顶盒。其中,所述第一红外码用于指示所述机顶盒获取第一频道的视频数据,并将第一频道的视频数据发送电视机。电视机,用于播放第一频道的视频数据。In a fifth aspect, the present application provides a system, which includes a remote control, a television, and an infrared control device. Wherein: the remote control is used to send a first control instruction to the television in response to the user's selection operation on the first channel. The television is used for sending the first infrared code corresponding to the first channel to the infrared control device after receiving the first control instruction. The infrared control device is used to send the first infrared code to the set-top box via infrared after receiving the first infrared code. Wherein, the first infrared code is used to instruct the set-top box to obtain the video data of the first channel, and send the video data of the first channel to the television. The TV set is used to play the video data of the first channel.
通过本申请提供的一种系统,当电视机通过遥控器接收到用户针对机顶盒输入的操作指令时,电视机可以将该操作指令对应的红外码发送给红外控制设备,红外控制设备在接收到红外码之后,可以发送该操作指令对应的红外控制信号给机顶盒。机顶盒在接收到该红外控制信号之后,可以执行该操作指令。这样,可以实现用户只需在单个遥控器上输入操作指令,就能完成对机顶盒和电视的控制。并且,即使机顶盒和电视机相对于遥控器而言在不同的方向上,也不需要用户在输入操作指令时,刻意的将遥控器对准某一个方向,实现了遥控器在任一方向上,都能对电视机和机顶盒进行控制。简化了用户的操作过程,提高了用户体验。Through the system provided by this application, when the TV receives an operation instruction input by the user for the set-top box through the remote control, the TV can send the infrared code corresponding to the operation instruction to the infrared control device, and the infrared control device receives the infrared After the code, the infrared control signal corresponding to the operation instruction can be sent to the set-top box. After receiving the infrared control signal, the set-top box can execute the operation instruction. In this way, it can be realized that the user only needs to input operation instructions on a single remote control to complete the control of the set-top box and the TV. Moreover, even if the set-top box and the TV are in different directions relative to the remote control, there is no need for the user to deliberately point the remote control in a certain direction when inputting operating instructions, so that the remote control can be in any direction. Control the TV and set-top box. Simplifies the user's operation process and improves the user experience.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在遥控器响应于用户针对第一频道的选择操作,向电视机发送第一控制指令之前,当电视机与机顶盒同时处于待机状态时:遥控器,还用于响应于用户针对电视机的开机操作,向电视机发送第二控制指令。其中,该第二控制指令用于指示电视机和机顶盒切换至开机状态。电视机,还用于在接收到第二控制指令后,切换至开机状态并向红外控制设备发送第二控制指令对应的第二红外码。红外控制设备,还用于在接收第二红外码后,将第二红外码通过红外线发送给机顶盒。其中,所述第二红外码,用于指示机顶盒切换至开机状态。这样,用户只需利用一个遥控器就可以同时遥控电视机和机顶盒开机,简化了用户的操作。In a possible implementation, before the remote control sends the first control instruction to the TV in response to the user's selection operation of the first channel, when the TV and the set-top box are in standby at the same time: the remote control is also used for In response to the user's power-on operation of the TV, a second control instruction is sent to the TV. Wherein, the second control instruction is used to instruct the television and the set-top box to switch to the on state. The television is also used to switch to the on state after receiving the second control instruction and send the second infrared code corresponding to the second control instruction to the infrared control device. The infrared control device is also used to send the second infrared code to the set-top box via infrared after receiving the second infrared code. Wherein, the second infrared code is used to instruct the set-top box to switch to the on state. In this way, the user can remotely control the TV and the set-top box to turn on at the same time with only one remote control, which simplifies the user's operation.
在一种可能的实现方式中,当电视机与机顶盒同时处于开机状态时:遥控器,还用于响应于用户针对电视机的待机操作,向电视机发送第三控制指令,用于指示电视机和机顶盒切换至待机状态。电视机,还用于在接收到第三控制指令后,切换至待机状态并向红外控制设备发送第三控制指令对应的第三红外码。红外控制设备,还用于在接收第三红外码后,将第三红外码通过红外线发送给机顶盒。其中,第三红外码,用于指示机顶盒切换至 待机状态。这样,用户只需利用一个遥控器就可以同时遥控电视机和机顶盒进行待机,简化了用户的操作。In a possible implementation, when the TV and the set-top box are in the on state at the same time: the remote control is also used to send a third control instruction to the TV in response to the user's standby operation on the TV, for instructing the TV And the set-top box switches to standby. The television is also used to switch to the standby state after receiving the third control instruction and send the third infrared code corresponding to the third control instruction to the infrared control device. The infrared control device is also used to send the third infrared code to the set-top box via infrared after receiving the third infrared code. Among them, the third infrared code is used to instruct the set-top box to switch to the standby state. In this way, the user only needs to use one remote control to control the TV and the set-top box in standby at the same time, which simplifies the user's operation.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在电视机播放第一频道的视频数据时,遥控器,还用于响应于用户的切换至第二频道的操作,向电视机发送第四控制指令。电视机,还用于在接收到第四控制指令后,确定第二频道的频道号对应的第四红外码,并向红外控制设备发送第四红外码。红外控制设备,还用于在接收到第四红外码后,将第四红外码通过红外线发送给机顶盒。其中,第四红外码,用于指示机顶盒获取第二频道的视频数据,并将第二频道的视频数据发送给电视机。电视机,还用于播放第二频道的视频数据。这样,用户可以在通过与电视机相连接的遥控器遥控机顶盒切台,实现了一个遥控器同时控制电视机和机顶盒,简化了用户的操作。In a possible implementation manner, when the TV plays the video data of the first channel, the remote control is also used to send a fourth control instruction to the TV in response to the user's operation of switching to the second channel. The television is also used to determine the fourth infrared code corresponding to the channel number of the second channel after receiving the fourth control instruction, and send the fourth infrared code to the infrared control device. The infrared control device is also used to send the fourth infrared code to the set-top box via infrared after receiving the fourth infrared code. Among them, the fourth infrared code is used to instruct the set-top box to obtain the video data of the second channel and send the video data of the second channel to the TV. The TV is also used to play the video data of the second channel. In this way, the user can remotely control the set-top box through the remote control connected with the TV to cut the station, realize that a remote control can control the TV and the set-top box at the same time, simplifying the user's operation.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:在电视机播放第一频道的视频数据时,遥控器,还用于响应于用户的切换至第二频道的操作,向电视机发送第四控制指令。电视机,还用于在接收到第四控制指令后,向红外控制设备发送第四控制指令对应的第五红外码。红外控制设备,还用于在接收到第五红外码后,将第五红外码通过红外线发送给机顶盒。其中,第五红外码用于指示机顶盒根据第五红外码和所述第一频道的频道号,确定出第二频道的频道号,再根据第二频道的频道号,获取第二频道的视频数据,并将第二频道的视频数据发送给电视机。电视机,还用于播放第二频道的视频数据。这样,用户可以在通过与电视机相连接的遥控器遥控机顶盒切台,实现了一个遥控器同时控制电视机和机顶盒,简化了用户的操作。In a possible implementation, the method further includes: when the TV is playing the video data of the first channel, the remote control is also used to send the fourth channel to the TV in response to the user's operation of switching to the second channel. Control instruction. The television is also used to send the fifth infrared code corresponding to the fourth control instruction to the infrared control device after receiving the fourth control instruction. The infrared control device is also used to send the fifth infrared code to the set-top box via infrared after receiving the fifth infrared code. The fifth infrared code is used to instruct the set-top box to determine the channel number of the second channel based on the fifth infrared code and the channel number of the first channel, and then obtain the video data of the second channel according to the channel number of the second channel , And send the video data of the second channel to the TV. The TV is also used to play the video data of the second channel. In this way, the user can remotely control the set-top box through the remote control connected with the TV to cut the station, realize that a remote control can control the TV and the set-top box at the same time, simplifying the user's operation.
第六方面,本申请提供了一种系统,该系统包括:电视机和红外控制设备。其中:电视机,用于接收遥控器在响应于针对第一频道的选择操作时发送的第一控制指令。电视机,还用于向红外控制设备发送第一频道对应的第一红外码。红外控制设备,用于在接收到第一红外码后,将第一红外码通过红外线发送给机顶盒。其中,所述第一红外码用于指示所述机顶盒获取第一频道的视频数据,并将第一频道的视频数据发送至电视机上播放。In a sixth aspect, the present application provides a system, which includes a TV set and infrared control equipment. Wherein: the television is used to receive the first control instruction sent by the remote controller in response to the selection operation for the first channel. The television is also used to send the first infrared code corresponding to the first channel to the infrared control device. The infrared control device is used to send the first infrared code to the set-top box via infrared after receiving the first infrared code. Wherein, the first infrared code is used to instruct the set-top box to obtain the video data of the first channel, and send the video data of the first channel to the TV for playing.
通过本申请提供的一种系统,当电视机通过遥控器接收到用户针对机顶盒输入的操作指令时,电视机可以将该操作指令对应的红外码发送给红外控制设备,红外控制设备在接收到红外码之后,可以发送该操作指令对应的红外控制信号给机顶盒。机顶盒在接收到该红外控制信号之后,可以执行该操作指令。这样,可以实现用户只需在单个遥控器上输入操作指令,就能完成对机顶盒和电视的控制。并且,即使机顶盒和电视机相对于遥控器而言在不同的方向上,也不需要用户在输入操作指令时,刻意的将遥控器对准某一个方向,实现了遥控器在任一方向上,都能对电视机和机顶盒进行控制。简化了用户的操作过程,提高了用户体验。Through the system provided by this application, when the TV receives an operation instruction input by the user for the set-top box through the remote control, the TV can send the infrared code corresponding to the operation instruction to the infrared control device, and the infrared control device receives the infrared After the code, the infrared control signal corresponding to the operation instruction can be sent to the set-top box. After receiving the infrared control signal, the set-top box can execute the operation instruction. In this way, it can be realized that the user only needs to input operation instructions on a single remote control to complete the control of the set-top box and the TV. Moreover, even if the set-top box and the TV are in different directions relative to the remote control, there is no need for the user to deliberately point the remote control in a certain direction when inputting operating instructions, so that the remote control can be in any direction. Control the TV and set-top box. Simplifies the user's operation process and improves the user experience.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在电视机接收第一控制指令之前,当电视机与机顶盒同时处于待机状态时:电视机,还用于接收遥控器在响应于用户针对电视机的开机操作时发送的第二控制指令。其中,该第二控制指令用于指示电视机和机顶盒切换至开机状态。电视机,还用于在接收到第二控制指令后,切换至开机状态并向红外控制设备发送第二控制指令对应的第二红外码。红外控制设备,还用于在接收第二红外码后,将第二红外码通过红 外线发送给机顶盒。其中,所述第二红外码,用于指示机顶盒切换至开机状态。这样,用户只需利用一个遥控器就可以同时遥控电视机和机顶盒开机,简化了用户的操作。In a possible implementation manner, before the television receives the first control instruction, when the television and the set-top box are in the standby state at the same time: the television is also used to receive the remote controller in response to the user's power-on operation of the television The second control command sent. Wherein, the second control instruction is used to instruct the television and the set-top box to switch to the on state. The television is also used to switch to the on state after receiving the second control instruction and send the second infrared code corresponding to the second control instruction to the infrared control device. The infrared control device is also used to send the second infrared code to the set-top box via the infrared line after receiving the second infrared code. Wherein, the second infrared code is used to instruct the set-top box to switch to the on state. In this way, the user can remotely control the TV and the set-top box to turn on at the same time with only one remote control, which simplifies the user's operation.
在一种可能的实现方式中,当电视机与机顶盒同时处于开机状态时:电视机,还用于接收遥控器在响应于用户针对电视机的待机操作时向电视机发送第三控制指令。其中,第三控制指令用于指示电视机和机顶盒切换至待机状态。电视机,还用于在接收到第三控制指令后,切换至待机状态并向红外控制设备发送第三控制指令对应的第三红外码。红外控制设备,还用于在接收第三红外码后,将第三红外码通过红外线发送给机顶盒。其中,第三红外码,用于指示机顶盒切换至待机状态。这样,用户只需利用一个遥控器就可以同时遥控电视机和机顶盒进行待机,简化了用户的操作。In a possible implementation manner, when the TV set and the set-top box are in the on-state at the same time: the TV set is also used for receiving the remote controller to send a third control instruction to the TV set in response to the user's standby operation of the TV set. Among them, the third control instruction is used to instruct the television and the set-top box to switch to the standby state. The television is also used to switch to the standby state after receiving the third control instruction and send the third infrared code corresponding to the third control instruction to the infrared control device. The infrared control device is also used to send the third infrared code to the set-top box via infrared after receiving the third infrared code. Among them, the third infrared code is used to instruct the set-top box to switch to the standby state. In this way, the user only needs to use one remote control to control the TV and the set-top box in standby at the same time, which simplifies the user's operation.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在电视机播放第一频道的视频数据时,电视机,还用于接收遥控器在响应于用户的切换至第二频道的操作时发送的第四控制指令。电视机,还用于在接收到第四控制指令后,确定第二频道的频道号对应的第四红外码,并向红外控制设备发送第四红外码。红外控制设备,还用于在接收到第四红外码后,将第四红外码通过红外线发送给机顶盒。其中,第四红外码,用于指示机顶盒获取第二频道的视频数据,并将第二频道的视频数据发送至电视机上播放。电视机,还用于播放第二频道的视频数据。这样,用户可以在通过与电视机相连接的遥控器遥控机顶盒切台,实现了一个遥控器同时控制电视机和机顶盒,简化了用户的操作。In a possible implementation manner, when the television plays the video data of the first channel, the television is also used to receive a fourth control instruction sent by the remote controller in response to the user's operation of switching to the second channel. The television is also used to determine the fourth infrared code corresponding to the channel number of the second channel after receiving the fourth control instruction, and send the fourth infrared code to the infrared control device. The infrared control device is also used to send the fourth infrared code to the set-top box via infrared after receiving the fourth infrared code. Among them, the fourth infrared code is used to instruct the set-top box to obtain the video data of the second channel and send the video data of the second channel to the TV for playing. The TV is also used to play the video data of the second channel. In this way, the user can remotely control the set-top box through the remote control connected with the TV to cut the station, realize that a remote control can control the TV and the set-top box at the same time, simplifying the user's operation.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:在电视机播放第一频道的视频数据时,电视机,还用于接收遥控器在响应于用户的切换至第二频道的操作时发送的第四控制指令。电视机,还用于在接收到第四控制指令后,向红外控制设备发送第四控制指令对应的第五红外码。红外控制设备,还用于在接收到第五红外码后,将第五红外码通过红外线发送给机顶盒。其中,第五红外码用于指示机顶盒根据第五红外码和所述第一频道的频道号,确定出第二频道的频道号,再根据第二频道的频道号,获取第二频道的视频数据,并将第二频道的视频数据发送至电视机上播放。电视机,还用于播放第二频道的视频数据。这样,用户可以在通过与电视机相连接的遥控器遥控机顶盒切台,实现了一个遥控器同时控制电视机和机顶盒,简化了用户的操作。In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: when the television is playing the video data of the first channel, the television is further configured to receive the remote control sent in response to the user's operation of switching to the second channel. The fourth control instruction. The television is also used to send the fifth infrared code corresponding to the fourth control instruction to the infrared control device after receiving the fourth control instruction. The infrared control device is also used to send the fifth infrared code to the set-top box via infrared after receiving the fifth infrared code. The fifth infrared code is used to instruct the set-top box to determine the channel number of the second channel based on the fifth infrared code and the channel number of the first channel, and then obtain the video data of the second channel according to the channel number of the second channel , And send the video data of the second channel to the TV to play. The TV is also used to play the video data of the second channel. In this way, the user can remotely control the set-top box through the remote control connected with the TV to cut the station, realize that a remote control can control the TV and the set-top box at the same time, simplifying the user's operation.
本申请中,电视机与遥控器之间可以通过低功耗蓝牙或者Wi-Fi直连进行通信,电视机与红外控制设可以通过低功耗蓝牙或者Wi-Fi直连进行通信。In this application, the television and the remote control can communicate through Bluetooth low energy or Wi-Fi direct connection, and the television and the infrared control device can communicate through Bluetooth low energy or Wi-Fi direct connection.
第七方面,本申请提供了一种机顶盒的控制方法,包括:电视机接收用户选择第一频道的第一控制指令。电视机发送第一频道对应的第一红外码;其中,第一红外码用于指示机顶盒获取第一频道的视频数据;所述电视机从所述机顶盒获取所述第一频道的视频数据,并播放所述第一频道的视频数据。In a seventh aspect, the present application provides a method for controlling a set-top box, including: a television receiving a first control instruction for a user to select a first channel. The television sends the first infrared code corresponding to the first channel; where the first infrared code is used to instruct the set-top box to obtain the video data of the first channel; the television obtains the video data of the first channel from the set-top box, and Playing the video data of the first channel.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在电视机接收用户选择第一频道的第一控制指令之前,该方法包括:当电视机与机顶盒同时处于待机状态时,电视机接收到第二控制指令,第二控制指令用于指示电视机和机顶盒切换至开机状态。响应于第二控制指令,电视机切换至开机状态,并发送第二控制指令对应的第二红外码。第二红外码用于指示机顶盒切换至开机状态。In a possible implementation manner, before the television receives the first control instruction for the user to select the first channel, the method includes: when the television and the set-top box are in a standby state at the same time, the television receives the second control instruction, and The second control instruction is used to instruct the TV and the set-top box to switch to the on state. In response to the second control instruction, the television is switched to the on state, and the second infrared code corresponding to the second control instruction is sent. The second infrared code is used to instruct the set-top box to switch to the power-on state.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:当电视机与机顶盒同时处于开机状态时,电视机接收第三控制指令,该第三控制指令用于指示电视机和机顶盒切换至待机状态;In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: when the television and the set-top box are in the on state at the same time, the television receives a third control instruction, and the third control instruction is used to instruct the television and the set-top box to switch to the standby state;
响应于第三控制指令,电视机切换至待机状态并发送第三控制指令对应的第三红外码。该第三红外码用于指示所述机顶盒切换至待机状态。In response to the third control instruction, the television set switches to a standby state and sends a third infrared code corresponding to the third control instruction. The third infrared code is used to instruct the set-top box to switch to the standby state.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:在电视机播放第一频道的视频数据时,电视机接收第四控制指令。第四控制指令用于指示电视机切台至第二频道。响应于第四控制指令,电视机确定出第二频道的频道号对应的第四红外码,并发送第四红外码。其中,第四红外码用于指示机顶盒获取第二频道的视频数据。电视机从机顶盒上获取第二频道的视频数据,并播放第二频道的视频数据。In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: when the television plays the video data of the first channel, the television receives the fourth control instruction. The fourth control instruction is used to instruct the TV to switch to the second channel. In response to the fourth control instruction, the television determines the fourth infrared code corresponding to the channel number of the second channel, and sends the fourth infrared code. Among them, the fourth infrared code is used to instruct the set-top box to obtain the video data of the second channel. The television obtains the video data of the second channel from the set-top box and plays the video data of the second channel.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:在电视机播放第一频道的视频数据时,电视机接收第四控制指令。第四控制指令用于指示所述电视机切台至第二频道。响应于第四控制指令,电视机发送第四控制指令对应的第五红外码。其中,第五红外码用于指示机顶盒根据第五红外码和第一频道的频道号,确定出第二频道的频道号,并根据第二频道的频道号,获取第二频道的视频数据。电视机从机顶盒获取第二频道的视频数据,并播放第二频道的视频数据。In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: when the television plays the video data of the first channel, the television receives the fourth control instruction. The fourth control instruction is used to instruct the television to switch to the second channel. In response to the fourth control instruction, the television sends a fifth infrared code corresponding to the fourth control instruction. Wherein, the fifth infrared code is used to instruct the set-top box to determine the channel number of the second channel according to the fifth infrared code and the channel number of the first channel, and obtain the video data of the second channel according to the channel number of the second channel. The television obtains the video data of the second channel from the set-top box and plays the video data of the second channel.
第八方面,本申请提供了一种电视机,包括:显示屏、通信模块、一个或多个处理器和一个或多个存储器;该一个或多个存储器与一个或多个处理器耦合,一个或多个存储器用于存储计算机程序代码,所述计算机程序代码包括计算机指令,当一个或多个处理器执行所述计算机指令时,使得所述电视执行上述任一方面任一项可能的实现方式中的机顶盒的控制方法。In an eighth aspect, the present application provides a television, including: a display screen, a communication module, one or more processors, and one or more memories; the one or more memories are coupled with one or more processors, and one Or multiple memories are used to store computer program codes, the computer program codes including computer instructions, when one or more processors execute the computer instructions, make the television execute any one of the possible implementations of any of the above aspects The control method of the set-top box in.
第九方面,本申请提供了一种计算机存储介质,包括计算机指令,当计算机指令在电视机上运行时,使得电视机执行上述任一方面任一项可能的实现方式中的机顶盒的控制方法。In a ninth aspect, this application provides a computer storage medium, including computer instructions, which when the computer instructions run on a television, cause the television to execute the set-top box control method in any one of the possible implementations of any of the foregoing aspects.
第十方面,本申请提供了一种计算机程序产品,当计算机程序产品在电视机上运行时,使得电视机执行上述任一方面任一项可能的实现方式中的机顶盒的控制方法。In a tenth aspect, this application provides a computer program product, which when the computer program product runs on a television, causes the television to execute the control method of the set-top box in any one of the possible implementations of any of the foregoing aspects.
附图说明Description of the drawings
图1A为本申请实施例提供的一种系统架构示意图;FIG. 1A is a schematic diagram of a system architecture provided by an embodiment of this application;
图1B为本申请实施例提供的一种另一种系统架构示意图;FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram of another system architecture provided by an embodiment of this application;
图2A为本申请实施例提供的一种电视机的结构示意图;2A is a schematic structural diagram of a TV set provided by an embodiment of the application;
图2B为本申请实施例提供的一种红外控制设备的结构示意图;2B is a schematic structural diagram of an infrared control device provided by an embodiment of this application;
图3为本申请实施例提供的一种机顶盒的控制方法的流程示意图;FIG. 3 is a schematic flowchart of a method for controlling a set-top box according to an embodiment of the application;
图4A-图4B为本申请实施例提供的一组界面示意图;4A-4B are schematic diagrams of a set of interfaces provided by an embodiment of the application;
图5A-图5B为本申请实施例提供的另一组界面示意图;5A-5B are schematic diagrams of another set of interfaces provided by an embodiment of this application;
图6A-图6D为本申请实施例提供的另一组界面示意图;6A-6D are schematic diagrams of another set of interfaces provided by an embodiment of the application;
图7A-图7B为本申请实施例提供的另一组界面示意图;7A-7B are schematic diagrams of another set of interfaces provided by an embodiment of the application;
图8A-图8B为本申请实施例提供的另一组界面示意图;8A-8B are schematic diagrams of another set of interfaces provided by an embodiment of this application;
图9为本申请实施例提供的另一种系统架构示意图;FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of another system architecture provided by an embodiment of the application;
图10A-图10B为本申请实施例提供的另一组界面示意图。10A-10B are schematic diagrams of another set of interfaces provided by an embodiment of the application.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
下面将结合附图对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行清除、详尽地描述。其中,在本申请实施例的描述中,除非另有说明,“/”表示或的意思,例如,A/B可以表示A或B;文本中的“和/或”仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况,另外,在本申请实施例的描述中,“多个”是指两个或多于两个。The technical solutions in the embodiments of the present application will be cleared and described in detail below in conjunction with the drawings. Among them, in the description of the embodiments of the present application, unless otherwise specified, "/" means or, for example, A/B can mean A or B; the "and/or" in the text is only a description of related objects The association relationship of indicates that there can be three relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can indicate: A alone exists, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone. In addition, in the description of the embodiments of this application , "Multiple" means two or more than two.
以下,术语“第一”、“第二”仅用于描述目的,而不能理解为暗示或暗示相对重要性或者隐含指明所指示的技术特征的数量。由此,限定有“第一”、“第二”的特征可以明示或者隐含地包括一个或者更多个该特征,在本申请实施例的描述中,除非另有说明,“多个”的含义是两个或两个以上。Hereinafter, the terms "first" and "second" are only used for descriptive purposes, and cannot be understood as implying or implying relative importance or implicitly specifying the number of indicated technical features. Therefore, the features defined with “first” and “second” may explicitly or implicitly include one or more of these features. In the description of the embodiments of the present application, unless otherwise specified, “multiple” The meaning is two or more.
目前,大部分的机顶盒遥控器是采用红外控制信号遥控,对机顶盒进行控制的。电视机可以支持红外遥控和/或低功耗蓝牙(bluetooth low energy,BLE)遥控。为了实现用一个遥控器,同时操控机顶盒和电视,一些机顶盒厂家生产出了一种机顶盒遥控器,可以学习电视机的红外码。At present, most set-top box remote controllers use infrared control signals to remotely control the set-top box. The TV can support infrared remote control and/or low energy Bluetooth (bluetooth low energy, BLE) remote control. In order to realize the use of a remote control to control the set-top box and the TV at the same time, some set-top box manufacturers have produced a set-top box remote control that can learn the infrared code of the TV.
例如,当用户需要通过机顶盒遥控器学习电视机遥控器上的某一个按键功能时,可以通过如下步骤对电视机遥控器发送的红外码进行学习:1、用户可以按住机顶盒遥控器上的“设置”按键,并保持一段时间(例如2秒),待该机顶盒遥控器上的提示灯由暗变亮时,即该机顶盒遥控器进入学习状态。2、用户可以按下机顶盒遥控器要学习的按键1,并将机顶盒遥控器的红外发射器和电视机遥控器的红外发射器对准,且在一条直线上约1到3厘米的位置处,再按下电视机遥控器上“电源”按键,保持一段时间(例如1秒)左右再放开。3、机顶盒遥控器将电视机遥控器上“电源”按键被按下时电视机遥控器所发射的红外码保存,并将该红外码与机顶盒上的按键1绑定。4、当机顶盒遥控接收到用户针对按键1的按压之后,机顶盒遥控器可以发送按键1绑定的红外码。For example, when the user needs to learn a key function on the TV remote control through the set-top box remote control, the infrared code sent by the TV remote control can be learned through the following steps: 1. The user can press and hold the " Set the button and hold it for a period of time (for example, 2 seconds). When the prompt light on the remote control of the set-top box turns from dark to bright, the remote control of the set-top box enters the learning state. 2. The user can press the key 1 that the set-top box remote control wants to learn, and align the infrared transmitter of the set-top box remote control and the infrared transmitter of the TV remote control, and at a position about 1 to 3 cm in a straight line, Then press the "Power" button on the TV remote control, hold it for a period of time (for example, 1 second) and then release it. 3. The set-top box remote control saves the infrared code emitted by the TV remote control when the "power" button on the TV remote control is pressed, and binds the infrared code to button 1 on the set-top box. 4. After the remote control of the set-top box receives the user's pressing of button 1, the remote control of the set-top box can send the infrared code bound to button 1.
当用户需要通过机顶盒遥控器,学习电视机遥控器上的其他按键时,都要重复进行上述红外码学习过程,这样,操作步骤比较复杂。而且,当电视机遥控器是通过低功耗蓝牙遥控对电视机进行控制时,机顶盒遥控器也无法学习电视机遥控器的按键对应的控制指令或者只能对电视进行简单的控制,比如对电视进行开关机,音量控制等简单操作。When users need to learn other keys on the TV remote control through the remote control of the set-top box, they must repeat the above infrared code learning process. In this way, the operation steps are more complicated. Moreover, when the TV remote control is controlled by the low-power Bluetooth remote control, the set-top box remote control cannot learn the control instructions corresponding to the buttons of the TV remote control or can only perform simple control of the TV, such as the TV Perform simple operations such as power on and off and volume control.
由于红外线本身的限制,机顶盒遥控器发射的红外线无法穿过障碍物进行遥控,也只能以很小的方向角度对机顶盒或者电视机进行遥控。在机顶盒遥控器学习了电视机遥控器上的红外码后,当用户利用机顶盒遥控器对电视机进行控制时,需要用户将机顶盒遥控器的红外发射器对准电视机上的红外接收器。当用户机顶盒遥控器对机顶盒遥控器进行控制时,用户需要对准机顶盒上的红外接收器。若机顶盒与电视机相隔较远时,用户利用机顶 盒遥控器控制机顶盒和电视机时,需要来回切换机顶盒遥控器上红外发射器的对准方向,影响用户体验。Due to the limitation of infrared rays, the infrared rays emitted by the set-top box remote control cannot pass through obstacles for remote control, and can only remotely control the set-top box or the TV set at a small direction angle. After the set-top box remote control learns the infrared code on the TV remote control, when the user uses the set-top box remote control to control the TV, the user needs to point the infrared transmitter of the set-top box remote control at the infrared receiver on the TV. When the user's set-top box remote control controls the set-top box remote control, the user needs to aim at the infrared receiver on the set-top box. If the set-top box is far away from the TV, when the user uses the set-top box remote control to control the set-top box and the TV, it is necessary to switch the alignment direction of the infrared transmitter on the set-top box remote control back and forth, which will affect the user experience.
因此,本申请实施例提供了一种机顶盒的控制方法、系统及相关装置,可以在机顶盒附近放置一个红外控制设备,其中,该红外控制设备的红外控制信号发射器对准机顶盒上的红外控制信号接收器,该红外控制设备与电视机通过蓝牙或WiFi通信。当电视机通过遥控器接收到用户针对机顶盒输入的操作指令时,电视机可以将该操作指令对应的红外码发送给红外控制设备,红外控制设备在接收到红外码之后,可以发送该操作指令对应的红外控制信号给机顶盒。机顶盒在接收到该红外控制信号之后,可以执行该操作指令。这样,可以实现用户只需在单个遥控器上输入操作指令,就能完成对机顶盒和电视的控制。并且,即使机顶盒和电视机相对于遥控器而言在不同的方向上,也不需要用户在输入操作指令时,刻意的将遥控器对准某一个方向,实现了遥控器在任一方向上,都能对电视机和机顶盒进行控制。简化了用户的操作过程,提高了用户体验。Therefore, the embodiments of the present application provide a set-top box control method, system, and related devices. An infrared control device can be placed near the set-top box, wherein the infrared control signal transmitter of the infrared control device is aligned with the infrared control signal on the set-top box Receiver, the infrared control device communicates with the TV through Bluetooth or WiFi. When the TV receives the operation instruction input by the user for the set-top box through the remote control, the TV can send the infrared code corresponding to the operation instruction to the infrared control device, and the infrared control device can send the corresponding operation instruction after receiving the infrared code. The infrared control signal to the set-top box. After receiving the infrared control signal, the set-top box can execute the operation instruction. In this way, it can be realized that the user only needs to input operation instructions on a single remote control to complete the control of the set-top box and the TV. Moreover, even if the set-top box and the TV are in different directions relative to the remote control, there is no need for the user to deliberately point the remote control in a certain direction when inputting operating instructions, so that the remote control can be in any direction. Control the TV and set-top box. Simplifies the user's operation process and improves the user experience.
下面介绍本申请实施例提供的一种系统。The following describes a system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
请参见图1A,图1A为本申请实施例提供的一种系统10的架构示意图。如图1A所示,该系统10可以包括:电视机110、红外控制设备120、遥控器130、机顶盒140、电视节目指南(electronic program guide,EPG)服务器150和频道识别服务器160。Please refer to FIG. 1A, which is a schematic diagram of the architecture of a system 10 according to an embodiment of the application. As shown in FIG. 1A, the system 10 may include: a TV 110, an infrared control device 120, a remote control 130, a set-top box 140, an electronic program guide (EPG) server 150, and a channel identification server 160.
其中,电视机110与红外控制设备120之间的链路连接101可以是低功耗蓝牙(bluetooth low energy,BLE)连接或WiFi直连连接。电视机110与遥控器130之间的链路连接102可以是低功耗蓝牙(bluetooth low energy,BLE)连接或WiFi直连连接。红外控制设备120与机顶盒140之间的通信方式103可以是红外线通信。电视机110与机顶盒140之间的链路连接104可以是高清晰多媒体接口(high definition multimedia interface,HDMI)线/音视频(audio and video,AV)线连接。电视机110与红外码库和EPG服务器150之间的链路连接105可以是因特网(Internet)建立的连接。电视机110与频道识别服务器160之间的链路连接106可以是通过因特网建立的连接。Wherein, the link connection 101 between the TV 110 and the infrared control device 120 may be a Bluetooth low energy (Bluetooth Low Energy, BLE) connection or a WiFi direct connection. The link connection 102 between the TV 110 and the remote control 130 may be a Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE) connection or a WiFi direct connection. The communication method 103 between the infrared control device 120 and the set-top box 140 may be infrared communication. The link connection 104 between the television 110 and the set-top box 140 may be a high definition multimedia interface (HDMI) cable/audio and video (AV) cable connection. The link connection 105 between the television 110, the infrared code library and the EPG server 150 may be a connection established by the Internet. The link connection 106 between the television 110 and the channel identification server 160 may be a connection established through the Internet.
遥控器130上可以有多个按键,例如,“up”按键、“down”按键、“left”按键、“right”按键、“确认”按键、开/关机按键、语音输入按键、“返回”按键、“主页”按键、“菜单”按键、“音量+”按键、“音量-”按键等。遥控器130可以通过这多个按键接收用户的输入操作,以控制电视110和机顶盒140。其中,该遥控器130不限于电视机110配套的遥控器,还可以是装有遥控器应用的手机或平板等终端。当手机或平板等终端上装有遥控器应用时,手机或平板等终端可以打开该遥控器应用显示遥控界面,该遥控界面中可以包括上述多个虚拟按键,终端可以通过这遥控界面中多个虚拟按键接收用户的输入操作,以控制电视机110和机顶盒140。There may be multiple buttons on the remote control 130, for example, "up" button, "down" button, "left" button, "right" button, "confirm" button, on/off button, voice input button, and "return" button , "Home" button, "Menu" button, "Volume +" button, "Volume -" button, etc. The remote control 130 can receive user input operations through these multiple keys to control the TV 110 and the set-top box 140. Wherein, the remote control 130 is not limited to the remote control matched with the television 110, and may also be a terminal such as a mobile phone or a tablet equipped with a remote control application. When a remote control application is installed on a terminal such as a mobile phone or tablet, the terminal such as a mobile phone or tablet can open the remote control application to display a remote control interface. The remote control interface may include the above-mentioned multiple virtual keys. The keys receive user input operations to control the television 110 and the set-top box 140.
机顶盒140可以是数字电视机顶盒或网络电视机顶盒。其中,数字电视机顶盒可以包括接收有线电视的数字机顶盒、接收卫星电视的数字机顶盒和接收地面广播电视的数字机顶盒。机顶盒140可以将接收到的直播视频数据通过HDMI线或AV线发送给电视机110。The set-top box 140 may be a digital television set-top box or a network television set-top box. Among them, the digital TV set-top box may include a digital set-top box that receives cable TV, a digital set-top box that receives satellite TV, and a digital set-top box that receives terrestrial broadcast TV. The set-top box 140 may send the received live video data to the television 110 through the HDMI line or the AV line.
红外码库和EPG服务器150上可以存储有各地区各运营商的机顶盒红外码库和EPG 信息。当电视机110与机顶盒140绑定连接后,电视机110可以通过Internet从红外码库和EPG服务器上下载与机顶盒140对应的红外码库和EPG信息。红外码库和EPG服务器150可以搜集直播电视频道和节目信息的变更信息,并同步至电视机110。The infrared code library and EPG server 150 may store the infrared code library and EPG information of the set-top box of each operator in each region. After the television 110 is bound and connected to the set-top box 140, the television 110 can download the infrared code library and EPG information corresponding to the set-top box 140 from the infrared code library and the EPG server through the Internet. The infrared code library and the EPG server 150 can collect the change information of live TV channels and program information, and synchronize them to the TV 110.
频道识别服务器160可以通过图像识别技术,对电视机110上传的包括有频道标识的图像进行分析,确定该图像对应的频道,例如:“CCTV-1”、“湖南卫视”等。The channel recognition server 160 can analyze the image including the channel identifier uploaded by the television 110 through image recognition technology, and determine the channel corresponding to the image, such as "CCTV-1", "Hunan Satellite TV" and so on.
本申请的实施例还可以适用于如图1B所示的系统架构11。如图1B所示,该系统架构11可以包括电视机110、红外控制设备120、遥控器130、机顶盒140、电视节目指南(electronic program guide,EPG)服务器150、频道识别服务器160和电视盒子190。The embodiments of the present application can also be applied to the system architecture 11 shown in FIG. 1B. As shown in FIG. 1B, the system architecture 11 may include a TV 110, an infrared control device 120, a remote control 130, a set-top box 140, an electronic program guide (EPG) server 150, a channel identification server 160, and a TV box 190.
其中,电视盒子190与红外控制设备120之间的链路连接1101可以是低功耗蓝牙(bluetooth low energy,BLE)连接或WiFi直连连接。电视盒子190与遥控器130之间的链路连接1102可以是低功耗蓝牙(bluetooth low energy,BLE)连接或WiFi直连连接。红外控制设备120与机顶盒140之间的通信方式1103可以是红外线通信。电视盒子190与机顶盒140之间的链路连接1104可以是高清晰多媒体接口(high definition multimedia interface,HDMI)线/音视频(audio and video,AV)线连接。电视盒子190与红外码库和EPG服务器150之间的链路连接1105可以是因特网(Internet)建立的连接。电视盒子190与频道识别服务器160之间的链路连接1106可以是通过因特网建立的连接。电视盒子190与电视机110之间的链路连接1107可以是高清晰多媒体接口(high definition multimedia interface,HDMI)线/音视频(audio and video,AV)线连接。Wherein, the link connection 1101 between the TV box 190 and the infrared control device 120 may be a Bluetooth low energy (bluetooth low energy, BLE) connection or a WiFi direct connection. The link connection 1102 between the TV box 190 and the remote control 130 may be a Bluetooth low energy (bluetooth low energy, BLE) connection or a WiFi direct connection. The communication method 1103 between the infrared control device 120 and the set-top box 140 may be infrared communication. The link connection 1104 between the TV box 190 and the set-top box 140 may be a high definition multimedia interface (HDMI) cable/audio and video (AV) cable connection. The link connection 1105 between the TV box 190 and the infrared code library and the EPG server 150 may be a connection established by the Internet (Internet). The link connection 1106 between the TV box 190 and the channel identification server 160 may be a connection established through the Internet. The link connection 1107 between the TV box 190 and the TV 110 may be a high definition multimedia interface (HDMI) cable/audio and video (AV) cable connection.
其中,电视盒子190用于输出显示内容给电视机110,电视机110用于显示电视盒子190的输出的显示内容。The TV box 190 is used to output display content to the TV 110, and the TV 110 is used to display the output display content of the TV box 190.
其中,电视机110、红外控制设备120、遥控器130、机顶盒140、电视节目指南(electronic program guide,EPG)服务器150和频道识别服务器160可以参考本申请的其他图示实施例,在此不再赘述。Among them, the television 110, the infrared control device 120, the remote control 130, the set-top box 140, the electronic program guide (EPG) server 150, and the channel identification server 160 can refer to other illustrated embodiments of this application, which will not be omitted here. Repeat.
图2A示例性示出了本申请实施例提供的电视机110的结构示意图。FIG. 2A exemplarily shows a schematic structural diagram of a television 110 provided in an embodiment of the present application.
如图2A所示,电视机110可以包括:处理器111,存储器112,无线通信处理模块113,电源开关114,有线LAN通信处理模块115,HDMI通信处理模块116,USB通信处理模块117,显示屏118,音频模块119,扬声器119A,等等。其中:As shown in FIG. 2A, the television 110 may include: a processor 111, a memory 112, a wireless communication processing module 113, a power switch 114, a wired LAN communication processing module 115, an HDMI communication processing module 116, a USB communication processing module 117, and a display screen 118, audio module 119, speaker 119A, etc. among them:
处理器111可用于读取和执行计算机可读指令。具体实现中,处理器111可主要包括控制器、运算器和寄存器。其中,控制器主要负责指令译码,并为指令对应的操作发出控制信号。运算器主要负责保存指令执行过程中临时存放的寄存器操作数和中间操作结果等。具体实现中,处理器111的硬件架构可以是专用集成电路(ASIC)架构、MIPS架构、ARM架构或者NP架构等等。The processor 111 can be used to read and execute computer-readable instructions. In specific implementation, the processor 111 may mainly include a controller, an arithmetic unit, and a register. Among them, the controller is mainly responsible for instruction decoding, and sends out control signals for the operation corresponding to the instruction. The arithmetic unit is mainly responsible for saving the register operands and intermediate operation results temporarily stored during the execution of instructions. In specific implementation, the hardware architecture of the processor 111 may be an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC) architecture, MIPS architecture, ARM architecture, or NP architecture, etc.
在一些实施例中,处理器111可以用于解析无线通信处理模块113和/有线LAN通信处理模块115接收到的信号,如红外控制设备120发送的数据请求,遥控器130发送的控制请求,红外码库和EPG服务器150发送的红外码库和EPG信息,频道识别服务器160返回的频道识别结果。处理器111可以用于根据解析结果进行相应的处理操作,如响应数 据请求,又如根据该控制请求,控制显示屏118的显示和/或控制音频模块119的输出,等等。In some embodiments, the processor 111 may be used to parse the signals received by the wireless communication processing module 113 and/or the wired LAN communication processing module 115, such as a data request sent by the infrared control device 120, a control request sent by the remote control 130, and infrared The code base and infrared code base and EPG information sent by the EPG server 150, and the channel identification result returned by the channel identification server 160. The processor 111 can be used to perform corresponding processing operations according to the analysis result, such as responding to a data request, or controlling the display of the display screen 118 and/or controlling the output of the audio module 119 according to the control request, and so on.
在一些实施例中,处理器111还可用于生成无线通信处理模块113和/有线LAN通信处理模块115向外发送的信号,如蓝牙广播信号、信标信号,又如向红外控制设备120发送包括红外码的信号,等等。In some embodiments, the processor 111 may also be used to generate signals sent by the wireless communication processing module 113 and/or the wired LAN communication processing module 115, such as Bluetooth broadcast signals, beacon signals, and for example, sending signals to the infrared control device 120 including Infrared code signal, etc.
存储器112与处理器111耦合,用于存储各种软件程序和/或多组指令。具体实现中,存储器112可包括高速随机存取的存储器,并且也可包括非易失性存储器,例如一个或多个磁盘存储设备、闪存设备或其他非易失性固态存储设备。存储器112可以存储操作系统,例如uCOS、VxWorks、RTLinux等嵌入式操作系统。存储器112还可以存储通信程序,该通信程序可用于与红外控制设备120,一个或多个服务器(包括红外码库和EPG服务器150,频道识别服务器160),遥控器130,机顶盒140进行通信。The memory 112 is coupled with the processor 111, and is used to store various software programs and/or multiple sets of instructions. In a specific implementation, the memory 112 may include a high-speed random access memory, and may also include a non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid-state storage devices. The memory 112 may store an operating system, such as embedded operating systems such as uCOS, VxWorks, and RTLinux. The memory 112 may also store a communication program, which may be used to communicate with the infrared control device 120, one or more servers (including the infrared code library and the EPG server 150, the channel recognition server 160), the remote control 130, and the set-top box 140.
无线通信处理模块113可以包括蓝牙(BT)通信处理模块113A、WLAN通信处理模块113B。The wireless communication processing module 113 may include a Bluetooth (BT) communication processing module 113A and a WLAN communication processing module 113B.
在一些实施例中,蓝牙(BT)通信处理模块113A、WLAN通信处理模块113B中的一项或多项可以监听到其他设备(如红外控制设备120、遥控器130)发射的信号,如探测请求、扫描信号等等,并可以发送响应信号,如探测响应、扫描响应等,使得其他设备(如红外控制设备120、遥控器130)可以发现电视机110,并与其他设备(如红外控制设备120、遥控器130)建立无线通信连接,通过蓝牙或WLAN中的一种或多种无线通信技术与其他设备(如红外控制设备120、遥控器130)进行通信。其中,蓝牙(BT)通信处理模块113A可以提供包括经典蓝牙(蓝牙2.1)或蓝牙低功耗(Bluetooth low energy,BLE)中一项或多项蓝牙通信的解决方案。WLAN通信处理模块113B可以包括Wi-Fi direct、Wi-Fi LAN或Wi-Fi softAP中一项或多项WLAN通信的解决方案。In some embodiments, one or more of the Bluetooth (BT) communication processing module 113A and the WLAN communication processing module 113B can monitor signals emitted by other devices (such as the infrared control device 120 and the remote control 130), such as detection requests. , Scanning signals, etc., and can send response signals, such as detection response, scanning response, etc., so that other devices (such as infrared control device 120, remote control 130) can discover the TV 110 and communicate with other devices (such as infrared control device 120). , The remote control 130) establishes a wireless communication connection, and communicates with other devices (such as the infrared control device 120 and the remote control 130) through one or more wireless communication technologies in Bluetooth or WLAN. Among them, the Bluetooth (BT) communication processing module 113A can provide solutions including one or more of Bluetooth communication in classic Bluetooth (Bluetooth 2.1) or Bluetooth low energy (Bluetooth low energy, BLE). The WLAN communication processing module 113B may include one or more WLAN communication solutions among Wi-Fi direct, Wi-Fi LAN, or Wi-Fi soft AP.
在另一些实施例中,蓝牙(BT)通信处理模块113A、WLAN通信处理模块113B中的一项或多项也可以发射信号,如广播蓝牙信号、信标信号,使得其他设备(如红外控制设备120、遥控器130)可以发现电视机110,并与其他设备(如红外控制设备120、遥控器130)建立无线通信连接,通过蓝牙或WLAN中的一种或多种无线通信技术与其他设备(如红外控制设备120、遥控器130)进行通信。In other embodiments, one or more of the Bluetooth (BT) communication processing module 113A and the WLAN communication processing module 113B can also transmit signals, such as broadcast Bluetooth signals, beacon signals, so that other devices (such as infrared control devices) 120. The remote control 130) can discover the TV 110, and establish a wireless communication connection with other devices (such as the infrared control device 120, the remote control 130), and communicate with other devices through one or more wireless communication technologies in Bluetooth or WLAN ( For example, the infrared control device 120, the remote controller 130) communicate.
在一些实施例中,电视机110可以通过WLAN无线通信技术连接上Internet,从而与Internet上的服务器(例如红外码库和EPG服务器150,频道识别服务器160,点播资源服务器,等等)建立通信连接。In some embodiments, the TV 110 can be connected to the Internet through WLAN wireless communication technology to establish a communication connection with servers on the Internet (for example, infrared code library and EPG server 150, channel identification server 160, on-demand resource server, etc.) .
无线通信处理模块113还可以包括红外线通信处理模块(未示出)。红外线通信处理模块可以通过红外遥控技术与其他设备(如遥控器)进行通信。The wireless communication processing module 113 may also include an infrared communication processing module (not shown). The infrared communication processing module can communicate with other devices (such as a remote control) through infrared remote control technology.
电源开关114可用于控制电源向显示器118的供电。The power switch 114 can be used to control the power supply to the display 118.
有线LAN通信处理模块115可用于通过有线LAN和同一个LAN中的其他设备进行通信,还可用于通过有线LAN连接到WAN,可与WAN中的设备通信。The wired LAN communication processing module 115 can be used to communicate with other devices in the same LAN via a wired LAN, and can also be used to connect to a WAN via a wired LAN, and can communicate with devices in the WAN.
HDMI通信处理模块116可用于通过HDMI接口(未示出)与机顶盒140等设备进行通信。例如,HDMI通信处理模块116可以通过HDMI接口(未示出)接收机顶盒140发送的直播视频数据,等等。The HDMI communication processing module 116 may be used to communicate with devices such as the set-top box 140 through an HDMI interface (not shown). For example, the HDMI communication processing module 116 may receive live video data sent by the set-top box 140 through an HDMI interface (not shown), and so on.
USB通信处理模块117可用于通过USB接口(未示出)与其他设备进行通信。The USB communication processing module 117 can be used to communicate with other devices through a USB interface (not shown).
显示屏118可用于显示图像,视频等。显示屏118可以采用液晶显示屏(liquid crystal display,LCD),有机发光二极管(organic light-emitting diode,OLED)显示屏,有源矩阵有机发光二极体(active-matrix organic light emitting diode,AMOLED)显示屏,柔性发光二极管(flexible light-emitting diode,FLED)显示屏,量子点发光二极管(quantum dot emitting diodes,QLED)显示屏等等。The display screen 118 can be used to display images, videos, etc. The display screen 118 may adopt a liquid crystal display (LCD), an organic light-emitting diode (OLED) display, or an active-matrix organic light emitting diode (AMOLED). Display screen, flexible light-emitting diode (FLED) display screen, quantum dot emitting diode (QLED) display screen, etc.
音频模块119可用于将数字音频信号转换成模拟音频信号输出,也可用于将模拟音频输入转换为数字音频信号。音频模块119还可以用于对音频信号编码和解码。在一些实施例中,音频模块119可以设置与处理器111中,或将音频模块119的部分功能模块设置与处理器111中。音频模块119可以通过总线接口(例如UART接口,等等)向无线通信模块113传递音频信号,实现通过蓝牙音箱播放音频信号的功能。The audio module 119 can be used to convert digital audio signals into analog audio signals for output, and can also be used to convert analog audio inputs into digital audio signals. The audio module 119 can also be used to encode and decode audio signals. In some embodiments, the audio module 119 may be installed in the processor 111, or some functional modules of the audio module 119 may be installed in the processor 111. The audio module 119 can transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 113 through a bus interface (such as a UART interface, etc.), so as to realize the function of playing audio signals through a Bluetooth speaker.
扬声器119A可以用于将音频模块119的发送的音频信号转换为声音信号。The speaker 119A may be used to convert the audio signal sent by the audio module 119 into a sound signal.
在一些实施例中,电视机110还可以包括有麦克风119B,也称“话筒”,“传声器”,用于将将声音信号转换为电信号。当发送语音控制指令时,用户可以通过人嘴发声,将声音信号输入到麦克风119B。In some embodiments, the television 110 may further include a microphone 119B, also called a "microphone" or a "microphone" for converting sound signals into electrical signals. When sending a voice control instruction, the user can make a voice through the human mouth and input the voice signal into the microphone 119B.
图2B示例性示出了本申请实施例提供的红外控制设备120的结构示意图。FIG. 2B exemplarily shows a schematic structural diagram of an infrared control device 120 provided in an embodiment of the present application.
如图2B所示,红外控制设备120可以包括:处理器121,存储器122,无线通信处理模块113,红外发射器124,电源模块125,等等。其中:As shown in FIG. 2B, the infrared control device 120 may include: a processor 121, a memory 122, a wireless communication processing module 113, an infrared transmitter 124, a power supply module 125, and so on. among them:
处理器121可用于读取和执行计算机可读指令。具体实现中,处理器121可主要包括控制器、运算器和寄存器。其中,控制器主要负责指令译码,并为指令对应的操作发出控制信号。运算器主要负责保存指令执行过程中临时存放的寄存器操作数和中间操作结果等。具体实现中,处理器121的硬件架构可以是专用集成电路(ASIC)架构、MIPS架构、ARM架构或者NP架构等等。The processor 121 may be used to read and execute computer-readable instructions. In specific implementation, the processor 121 may mainly include a controller, an arithmetic unit, and a register. Among them, the controller is mainly responsible for instruction decoding, and sends out control signals for the operation corresponding to the instruction. The arithmetic unit is mainly responsible for saving the register operands and intermediate operation results temporarily stored during the execution of instructions. In a specific implementation, the hardware architecture of the processor 121 may be an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC) architecture, MIPS architecture, ARM architecture, NP architecture, or the like.
在一些实施例中,处理器121可以用于解析无线通信处理模块113接收到的信号,如如电视机110发送的包括有红外码的信号,等等。In some embodiments, the processor 121 may be used to parse the signal received by the wireless communication processing module 113, such as a signal including an infrared code sent by the television 110, and so on.
在一些实施例中,处理器121还可用于生成无线通信处理模块113向外发送的信号,如蓝牙广播信号、信标信号,又如根据接收到的红外码发送的红外控制信号,等等。In some embodiments, the processor 121 may also be used to generate signals sent from the wireless communication processing module 113, such as Bluetooth broadcast signals, beacon signals, and infrared control signals sent according to received infrared codes, and so on.
存储器122与处理器121耦合,用于存储各种软件程序和/或多组指令。具体实现中,存储器122可包括高速随机存取的鵆器,并且也可包括非易失性存储器,例如一个或多个闪存设备或其他非易失性固态存储设备。存储器122可以存储通信程序,该通信程序可用于与电视机110,机顶盒140进行通信。The memory 122 is coupled with the processor 121, and is used to store various software programs and/or multiple sets of instructions. In a specific implementation, the memory 122 may include a high-speed random access device, and may also include a non-volatile memory, such as one or more flash memory devices or other non-volatile solid-state storage devices. The memory 122 may store a communication program, and the communication program may be used to communicate with the television 110 and the set-top box 140.
无线通信处理模块123可以包括蓝牙(BT)通信处理模块123A、WLAN通信处理模块123B中的一项或多项,以及红外线通信处理模块123C。The wireless communication processing module 123 may include one or more of a Bluetooth (BT) communication processing module 123A, a WLAN communication processing module 123B, and an infrared communication processing module 123C.
其中,蓝牙(BT)通信处理模块123A、WLAN通信处理模块123B中的一项或多项可以监听到其他设备(如电视机110)发射的信号,如探测请求、扫描信号等等,并可以发送响应信号,如探测响应、扫描响应等,使得其他设备(如电视机110)可以发现红外控制设备120,并与其他设备(如电视机110)建立无线通信连接。其中,蓝牙(BT)通信处理 模块113A可以提供包括经典蓝牙(蓝牙2.1)或蓝牙低功耗(Bluetooth low energy,BLE)中一项或多项蓝牙通信的解决方案。WLAN通信处理模块113B可以包括Wi-Fi direct、Wi-Fi LAN或Wi-Fi softAP中一项或多项WLAN通信的解决方案。红外线通信处理模块123C可以根据红外码,调制出红外控制信号,并通过红外发射器124发送红外控制信号。Among them, one or more of the Bluetooth (BT) communication processing module 123A and the WLAN communication processing module 123B can monitor signals emitted by other devices (such as the TV 110), such as detection requests, scanning signals, etc., and can send The response signal, such as detection response, scan response, etc., enables other devices (such as the TV 110) to discover the infrared control device 120 and establish a wireless communication connection with other devices (such as the TV 110). Among them, the Bluetooth (BT) communication processing module 113A can provide solutions that include one or more of Bluetooth communication in classic Bluetooth (Bluetooth 2.1) or Bluetooth low energy (Bluetooth low energy, BLE). The WLAN communication processing module 113B may include one or more WLAN communication solutions among Wi-Fi direct, Wi-Fi LAN, or Wi-Fi soft AP. The infrared communication processing module 123C can modulate the infrared control signal according to the infrared code, and send the infrared control signal through the infrared transmitter 124.
其中,红外发射器124可以是红外发光二极管,用于向外辐射红外控制信号。Among them, the infrared transmitter 124 may be an infrared light-emitting diode, which is used to radiate an infrared control signal to the outside.
其中,红外控制设备120还可以包括红外接收器(未示出),该红外接收器可以与红外线通信处理模块123C连接,用于接收红外信号。The infrared control device 120 may further include an infrared receiver (not shown), which may be connected to the infrared communication processing module 123C for receiving infrared signals.
在一些实施例中,由于红外发射器124发送红外控制信号具有方向性,红外控制设备120中可以包括多个红外发射器124,用于增加红外控制信号的辐射角度。例如,通过在红外控制设备120四周配置多个红外发射器124,可以增大红外控制设备120的红外控制信号覆盖范围。当红外控制设备120包括有多个红外发射器124时,红外控制设备120可以控制多个红外发射器124中的任一个或多个单独发射红外控制信号。In some embodiments, since the infrared transmitter 124 sends infrared control signals with directivity, the infrared control device 120 may include multiple infrared transmitters 124 for increasing the radiation angle of the infrared control signal. For example, by arranging multiple infrared emitters 124 around the infrared control device 120, the infrared control signal coverage of the infrared control device 120 can be increased. When the infrared control device 120 includes a plurality of infrared transmitters 124, the infrared control device 120 can control any one or more of the plurality of infrared transmitters 124 to individually emit infrared control signals.
电源管理模块125可用于连接电池(未示出),充电管理模块(未示出)与处理器121。电源管理模块125接收电池(未示出)和/或充电管理模块(未示出)的输入,为处理器121,存储器122,无线通信处理模块123,红外发射器124等供电。电源管理模块125还可以用于监测电池容量,电池循环次数,电池健康状态(漏电,阻抗)等参数。The power management module 125 can be used to connect a battery (not shown), a charging management module (not shown) and the processor 121. The power management module 125 receives input from a battery (not shown) and/or a charging management module (not shown), and supplies power to the processor 121, the memory 122, the wireless communication processing module 123, the infrared transmitter 124, and the like. The power management module 125 can also be used to monitor parameters such as battery capacity, battery cycle times, and battery health status (leakage, impedance).
在一些实施例中,红外控制设备120可以与其他设备(例如,蓝牙音箱或上述电视机110等)结合为一体,红外控制设备120可以包括有更多的组件。例如,当红外控制设备120为一种带有红外遥控功能的蓝牙音箱时,该红外控制设备120还可以包括有音频模块(未示出)、扬声器(未示出)、麦克风(未示出),等等。该音频模块可用于将数字音频信号转换成模拟音频信号输出,也可用于将模拟音频输入转换为数字音频信号。音频模块还可以用于对音频信号编码和解码。在一些实施例中,音频模块(未示出)可以设置与处理器121中,或将音频模块(未示出)的部分功能模块设置与处理器121中。In some embodiments, the infrared control device 120 may be integrated with other devices (for example, a Bluetooth speaker or the above-mentioned television 110, etc.), and the infrared control device 120 may include more components. For example, when the infrared control device 120 is a Bluetooth speaker with an infrared remote control function, the infrared control device 120 may also include an audio module (not shown), a speaker (not shown), and a microphone (not shown). ,and many more. The audio module can be used to convert digital audio signals into analog audio signals for output, and can also be used to convert analog audio inputs into digital audio signals. The audio module can also be used to encode and decode audio signals. In some embodiments, the audio module (not shown) may be installed in the processor 121, or part of the functional modules of the audio module (not shown) may be installed in the processor 121.
又例如,红外控制设备120与电视机110集成一体时,电视机110可以在接收到用户输入的控制指令(例如开机指令、选择频道的指令、切台指令、待机指令等等)后,可以向外发送该控制指令对应的红外码。机顶盒140可以在接收到该控制指令对应的红外码后,执行该控制指令对应的操作(例如开机、选择指定的频道、切换频道、待机等等)。具体内容,可以参考后续实施例,在此不再赘述。For another example, when the infrared control device 120 is integrated with the TV 110, the TV 110 can send a message to the TV 110 after receiving a control command input by the user (such as a power-on command, a channel selection command, a channel cut command, a standby command, etc.) Send the infrared code corresponding to the control command. After receiving the infrared code corresponding to the control instruction, the set-top box 140 may perform operations corresponding to the control instruction (for example, power on, select a designated channel, switch channels, standby, etc.). For specific content, please refer to the subsequent embodiments, which will not be repeated here.
下面示例性的基于上述图1A所示系统10,介绍本申请实施例中提供的一种机顶盒的控制方法。The following exemplarily introduces a set-top box control method provided in an embodiment of the present application based on the system 10 shown in FIG. 1A.
在一些应用场景中,当电视机110和机顶盒140都处于待机时,电视机110可以通过遥控器130接收到用户的开机操作,点亮显示屏。同时,电视机110可以通过红外控制设备120向机顶盒140发送红外控制信号,使机顶盒140同步开机。这样,可以节省用户等待电视机110和机顶盒140开机的时间。在电视机110和机顶盒140都开机之后,电视机110可以显示主页界面,该主页界面上可以包括有机顶盒140上的多个直播频道选项。在用户通过遥控器选择了某一直播频道选项(例如湖南卫视选项)之后,电视机110即可通过红外控制设备120发送红外控制信号,控制机顶盒140输出该直播频道的视频数据给电视 机110。这样,在电视机110的主页上显示直播频道选项和点播资源信息,让电视机110可以快速在直播源和点播源之间切换。In some application scenarios, when the TV 110 and the set-top box 140 are both in standby, the TV 110 may receive the user's power-on operation through the remote control 130 to light up the display screen. At the same time, the television 110 can send an infrared control signal to the set-top box 140 through the infrared control device 120, so that the set-top box 140 is turned on synchronously. In this way, the time for the user to wait for the television 110 and the set-top box 140 to be turned on can be saved. After the television 110 and the set-top box 140 are both turned on, the television 110 may display a home page interface, which may include multiple live channel options on the organic top box 140. After the user selects a certain live channel option (for example, Hunan Satellite TV option) through the remote control, the television 110 can send an infrared control signal through the infrared control device 120 to control the set-top box 140 to output the video data of the live channel to the television 110. In this way, the live channel options and on-demand resource information are displayed on the homepage of the TV 110, so that the TV 110 can quickly switch between the live source and the on-demand source.
图3示例性的示出了本申请实施例提供的一种机顶盒的控制方法的流程示意图。如图3所示,电视机110可以与遥控器130建立无线连接(例如蓝牙低功耗(BLE)连接),电视机110可以与红外控制设备120建立无线连接(例如BLE连接或Wi-Fi direct连接),电视机110与机顶盒140可以通过HDMI线/AV线建立有线连接,红外控制设备120可以通过红外线向机顶盒发送控制指令。Fig. 3 exemplarily shows a flow chart of a method for controlling a set-top box provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 3, the TV 110 can establish a wireless connection with the remote control 130 (such as a Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE) connection), and the TV 110 can establish a wireless connection with the infrared control device 120 (such as a BLE connection or Wi-Fi direct). Connection), the TV 110 and the set-top box 140 can establish a wired connection through an HDMI cable/AV cable, and the infrared control device 120 can send a control command to the set-top box through infrared rays.
如图3所示,本申请实施例提供的一种机顶盒的控制方法可以包括:As shown in FIG. 3, a method for controlling a set-top box provided by an embodiment of the present application may include:
S301、电视机110获取红外码库和EPG数据。S301. The television 110 acquires the infrared code library and EPG data.
在电视机110与机顶盒140建立连接之后,电视机110可以先获取出机顶盒140的型号。然后,电视机110根据机顶盒140的型号,从红外码库和EPG服务器150上获取机顶盒140对应的红外码库和电子节目指南(electronic program guide,EPG)数据。其中,红外码库包括机顶盒140的控制指令与红外码(也可称为红外波形编码数据)的对应关系、直播频道(可用频道编号表示)与红外码的对应关系。其中,不同的红外码可用于调制出不同的红外控制信号。After the TV 110 and the set-top box 140 are connected, the TV 110 may first obtain the model of the set-top box 140. Then, the television 110 obtains the infrared code library and electronic program guide (EPG) data corresponding to the set top box 140 from the infrared code library and the EPG server 150 according to the model of the set top box 140. Among them, the infrared code library includes the correspondence between the control instructions of the set-top box 140 and the infrared code (also referred to as infrared waveform coded data), and the correspondence between the live channel (indicated by the channel number) and the infrared code. Among them, different infrared codes can be used to modulate different infrared control signals.
EPG数据包括有频道编号与电视台的对应关系,以及各电视台的节目数据。例如频道编号“023”对应“湖南卫视”,频道编号“024”对应“浙江卫视”,“029”对应“中央电视1台(即CCTV-1)”,等等。各电视台的节目数据可以包括一定时间内的节目信息,例如“湖南卫视,19:00-19:30新闻联播”,“浙江卫视,21:00-23:00中国好声音”,等等。The EPG data includes the correspondence between the channel number and the TV station, and the program data of each TV station. For example, the channel number "023" corresponds to "Hunan Satellite TV", the channel number "024" corresponds to "Zhejiang Satellite TV", "029" corresponds to "China Central Television 1 (CCTV-1)", and so on. The program data of each TV station may include program information within a certain period of time, such as "Hunan Satellite TV, 19:00-19:30 News Broadcast", "Zhejiang Satellite TV, 21:00-23:00 China Good Voice", and so on.
由于不同地区不同的运营商提供的红外码库可能不同,为了确保电视机110下载的红外码库与机顶盒140相匹配。本申请实施例中可以通过如下可能的实现方式,来确保电视机110下载到与机顶盒140匹配正确的红外码库:Since the infrared code libraries provided by different operators in different regions may be different, in order to ensure that the infrared code library downloaded by the television 110 matches the set-top box 140. In the embodiments of the present application, the following possible implementations can be used to ensure that the television 110 downloads to the infrared code library that matches the set-top box 140 correctly:
实现方式1:电视机110可以从网络服务器上下载机顶盒型号列表,在电视机与机顶盒140建立连接之后,电视机110可以根据机顶盒型号列表,显示多个机顶盒型号选项供用户选择。电视机110可以接收用户针对多个机顶盒型号选项中第一型号选项的选择输入,响应于该针对第一型号选项的选择输入,电视机110可以将用户选择的第一型号确定为机顶盒140(例如“HC2600”)的型号。在确定出机顶盒140的型号之后,电视机110可以从红外码库和EPG服务器150下载机顶盒140的型号对应的红外码库和EPG数据。Implementation method 1: The television 110 can download a set-top box model list from a network server. After the television and the set-top box 140 are connected, the television 110 can display multiple set-top box model options for the user to choose according to the set-top box model list. The television 110 may receive a user's selection input for the first model option among the multiple set-top box model options, and in response to the selection input for the first model option, the television 110 may determine the first model selected by the user as the set-top box 140 (for example, "HC2600") model. After the model of the set-top box 140 is determined, the television 110 can download the infrared code library and EPG data corresponding to the model of the set-top box 140 from the infrared code library and the EPG server 150.
实现方式2:电视机110可以向红外控制设备120依次发送不同机顶盒型号对应的红外测试码(例如开/关机指令对应的红外码),红外控制设备120可以根据红外测试码,调制出红外测试信号,并向外发射该红外测试信号。若机顶盒140在接收到该红外测试信号后,通过HDMI线或AV线发送响应信号给电视机110,则电视机110在接收到该响应信号后,可以确定该红外测试码对应的型号为机顶盒140的型号。Implementation 2: The TV 110 can sequentially send infrared test codes corresponding to different set-top box models (for example, the infrared codes corresponding to the on/off instructions) to the infrared control device 120, and the infrared control device 120 can modulate the infrared test signals according to the infrared test codes , And launch the infrared test signal outward. If the set-top box 140 sends a response signal to the TV 110 through the HDMI or AV cable after receiving the infrared test signal, the TV 110 can determine that the model corresponding to the infrared test code is the set-top box 140 after receiving the response signal Model.
示例性的,不同机顶盒型号对应的红外测试信号可以如下表1所示:Exemplarily, the infrared test signals corresponding to different set-top box models can be shown in Table 1 below:
表1Table 1
机顶盒型号Set-top box model 红外测试码Infrared test code
WH1000WH1000 0x010x01
GT2400GT2400 1x011x01
HC2600HC2600 2x012x01
AR2300AR2300 3x013x01
NP2130NP2130 4x014x01
由上表1可以看出,机顶盒型号“WH1000”对应的红外测试码为“0x01”,机顶盒型号“GT2400”对应的红外测试码为“1x01”,机顶盒型号“HC2600”对应的红外测试码为“2x01”。机顶盒型号“AR2300”对应的红外测试码为“3x01”。机顶盒型号“NP2130”对应的红外测试码为“4x01”。电视机110可以通过红外控制设备120依次向外发送红外测试码“0x01”、“2x01”、“3x01”、“4x01”等。若电视机110在通过红外控制设备120发送红外测试码“2x01”后,接收到了机顶盒140通过HDMI线或AV线发送的响应信号,则电视机110可以确定“HC2600”为机顶盒140的型号。上述示例仅仅用于解释本申请,不应构成限定。It can be seen from Table 1 that the infrared test code corresponding to the STB model "WH1000" is "0x01", the infrared test code corresponding to the STB model "GT2400" is "1x01", and the infrared test code corresponding to the STB model "HC2600" is " 2x01". The infrared test code corresponding to the set-top box model "AR2300" is "3x01". The infrared test code corresponding to the set-top box model "NP2130" is "4x01". The television 110 may send infrared test codes "0x01", "2x01", "3x01", "4x01", and the like outwards in sequence through the infrared control device 120. If the television 110 receives the response signal sent by the set-top box 140 via the HDMI or AV cable after sending the infrared test code "2x01" through the infrared control device 120, the television 110 can determine that "HC2600" is the model of the set-top box 140. The above examples are only used to explain the application and should not constitute a limitation.
实现方式3:电视机110可以从切换后的频道的播放画面中截取电视台的台标所识别的电视台与EPG数据中预计切换到的频道编号所对应的电视台是否相同,来验证所获取的红外码库是否与机顶盒140匹配。若匹配,则电视机110可以使用该红外码库,通过红外控制设备120,遥控机顶盒140。若不匹配,则电视110可以重新下载另一套红外码库,验证是否与机顶盒140匹配,直至找出与机顶盒140匹配的红外码库。Implementation mode 3: The TV 110 can intercept the TV station identified by the station logo of the TV station from the broadcast screen of the switched channel and whether the TV station corresponding to the channel number expected to be switched to in the EPG data is the same to verify the obtained infrared code Whether the library matches the set-top box 140. If it matches, the television 110 can use the infrared code library to remotely control the set-top box 140 through the infrared control device 120. If it does not match, the TV 110 can re-download another set of infrared code libraries and verify whether it matches with the set-top box 140 until it finds an infrared code library that matches the set-top box 140.
示例性的,当前电视机110正在播放中央1台的节目,频道编号为1,电视机110将当前的红外码库中“UP”键相对应的红外码,封装成数据包,通过BLE或Wi-Fi直连,发送给红外控制设备120。红外控制设备120通过该红外码,发送该红外码对应的红外控制信号,以遥控机顶盒140切换至下一个频道。电视机110可以将切换后的频道的播放画面中截取电视台的台标,并将该台标上传至频道识别服务器160。频道识别服务器160可以识别出该台标对应的频道编号,并返回该频道编号给电视机110。并且,电视机110可以从EPG数据中,确定出预计切换到的频道为中央2台,编号为2。若频道识别服务器160识别出切换后的频道编号为2,与预计切换到的频道编号是否一致,则电视机110当前使用的红外码库是正确的。若频道识别服务器160识别出切换后的频道编号为10,与预计切换到的频道编号不一致,则电视机110可以从红外码库与EPG服务器150上重新下载另一套红外码库。或者从电视机110已下载的多套红外控制信号库中,选择另一套红外控制信号库进行验证。以上示例仅仅用于解释本申请,不应构成限定。Exemplarily, the TV 110 is currently playing the program of Central Station 1, and the channel number is 1. The TV 110 encapsulates the infrared code corresponding to the "UP" key in the current infrared code library into a data packet, and uses BLE or Wi -Fi direct connection and send to infrared control device 120. The infrared control device 120 transmits the infrared control signal corresponding to the infrared code through the infrared code to remotely control the set-top box 140 to switch to the next channel. The television 110 may intercept the logo of the television station in the playback screen of the switched channel, and upload the logo to the channel identification server 160. The channel identification server 160 can identify the channel number corresponding to the station logo, and return the channel number to the television 110. In addition, the TV 110 can determine from the EPG data that the channel to be switched to is the central 2 channel, and the number is 2. If the channel identification server 160 recognizes that the switched channel number is 2 and is consistent with the expected channel number to be switched to, the infrared code library currently used by the television 110 is correct. If the channel identification server 160 recognizes that the switched channel number is 10, which is inconsistent with the channel number expected to be switched to, the TV 110 can download another infrared code library from the infrared code library and the EPG server 150 again. Or select another set of infrared control signal libraries from the multiple sets of infrared control signal libraries that have been downloaded by the television 110 for verification. The above examples are only used to explain the application and should not constitute a limitation.
S302、当电视机110处于待机状态时,遥控器130可以接收用户针对电视机的开机操作。S302. When the TV 110 is in a standby state, the remote control 130 may receive a user's power-on operation of the TV.
S303、响应于该开机操作,遥控器130发送电视开机指令给电视机110。S303. In response to the power-on operation, the remote control 130 sends a TV power-on instruction to the TV 110.
遥控器130可以包括有一个或多个物理按键,例如开/关机按键,“up”按键,“down”按键,“left”按键,“right”按键、“OK”按键,“主页”按键,“菜单”按键,等等。该针对电视机110的开机操作,可以是用户按下遥控器130上的开/关机按键。遥控器130接收到用户针对开/关机按键的按压操作之后,可以向电视机110发送开机指令。The remote control 130 may include one or more physical buttons, such as on/off button, "up" button, "down" button, "left" button, "right" button, "OK" button, "home" button, " Menu" button, etc. The power-on operation for the television 110 may be that the user presses the on/off button on the remote control 130. After the remote control 130 receives the user's pressing operation on the on/off button, it can send a power on instruction to the television 110.
在一种可能的实现方式中,遥控器130可以接收用户的语音输入,遥控器130可以将用户输入的语音(例如“小艺小艺,打开电视机”)发送给电视机110,电视机110可以从语音中,解析出开机指令。In a possible implementation, the remote control 130 may receive the user's voice input, and the remote control 130 may send the voice input by the user (for example, "Xiaoyi Xiaoyi, turn on the TV") to the TV 110, the TV 110 The boot command can be parsed from the voice.
本申请实施例中,开机指令可以称为第二控制指令,开机指令对应的红外码可以称为第二红外码,其他实施例中也同样适用。In the embodiments of the present application, the boot instruction may be referred to as the second control instruction, and the infrared code corresponding to the boot instruction may be referred to as the second infrared code, which is also applicable in other embodiments.
S304、电视机110响应于接收到的开机指令,进行开机。S304. The TV 110 responds to the received power-on instruction to turn on.
S305、电视机110在开机后,从机顶盒140对应的红外码库中匹配出机顶盒开机指令对应的红外码。S305. After the television 110 is turned on, the infrared code corresponding to the set-top box boot instruction is matched from the infrared code library corresponding to the set-top box 140.
S306、电视机110将机顶盒开机指令对应的红外码发送给红外控制设备120。S306. The television 110 sends the infrared code corresponding to the boot instruction of the set-top box to the infrared control device 120.
S307、红外控制设备120根据开机指令对应的红外码,向外发送开机红外控制信号。S308、机顶盒140在接收到开机红外控制信号之后开机。S307. The infrared control device 120 sends a power-on infrared control signal to the outside according to the infrared code corresponding to the power-on instruction. S308. The set-top box 140 is turned on after receiving the power-on infrared control signal.
示例性的,机顶盒140对应的红外码库可以如下表2所示:Exemplarily, the infrared code library corresponding to the set-top box 140 may be as shown in Table 2 below:
表2Table 2
控制指令Control instruction 红外码Infrared code
开/关机On/off 2x012x01
音量加Volume up 2x022x02
音量减Volume down 2x032x03
频道编号001Channel number 001 2x042x04
频道编号002Channel number 002 2x052x05
频道编号003Channel number 003 2x062x06
频道编号004Channel number 004 2x072x07
频道编号005Channel number 005 2x082x08
频道编号006Channel number 006 2x092x09
频道编号007Channel number 007 2x102x10
……... ……...
由上表2可以看出,开/关机指令对应的红外码为“2x01”,“音量加”对应的红外码“2x02”,“音量减”对应的红外码“2x03”,频道编号001对应的红外码为“2x04”,频道编号002对应的红外码为“2x05”,频道编号003对应的红外码为“2x06”,频道编号004对应的红外码为“2x07”,频道编号005对应的红外码为“2x08”,频道编号006对应的红外码为“2x09”,频道编号007对应的红外码为“2x10”,等等。上述表2所示示例仅仅用于解释本申请,不应构成限定。It can be seen from Table 2 above that the infrared code corresponding to the on/off command is "2x01", the infrared code corresponding to "volume up" is "2x02", the infrared code corresponding to "volume down" is "2x03", and the channel number is 001. The infrared code is "2x04", the infrared code corresponding to channel number 002 is "2x05", the infrared code corresponding to channel number 003 is "2x06", the infrared code corresponding to channel number 004 is "2x07", and the infrared code corresponding to channel number 005 is "2x07". Is "2x08", the infrared code corresponding to channel number 006 is "2x09", the infrared code corresponding to channel number 007 is "2x10", and so on. The examples shown in Table 2 above are only used to explain this application and should not constitute a limitation.
电视机110可以通过BLE或Wi-Fi直连技术,将开机指令对应的红外码(例如“2x01”),封装成数据包,发送给红外控制设备120。红外控制设备120在接收到开机指令对应的红外码(例如“2x01”)后,红外控制设备120可以根据该开机指令对应的红外码(例如“2x01”),调制出开机红外控制信号,并通过红外发射器发送该开机红外控制信号。The television 110 can encapsulate the infrared code (for example, “2x01”) corresponding to the power-on instruction into a data packet through BLE or Wi-Fi direct connection technology, and send it to the infrared control device 120. After the infrared control device 120 receives the infrared code (such as "2x01") corresponding to the boot instruction, the infrared control device 120 can modulate the boot infrared control signal according to the infrared code (such as "2x01") corresponding to the boot instruction, and pass The infrared transmitter sends the power-on infrared control signal.
在一种可能的实现方式中,电视机110可以将机顶盒140对应的红外码库下发至红外控制设备120上,电视机110可以通过BLE或Wi-Fi直连技术,将开机指令封装成数据包,发送给红外控制设备120。红外控制设备120在接收到开机指令之后,可以从该数据包解析出开机指令,并确定出该开机指令对应的红外码(例如“2x01”)。然后,红外控制设备120 可以调制出开机红外控制信号,并通过红外发射器发送该开机红外控制信号。In a possible implementation, the TV 110 can send the infrared code library corresponding to the set-top box 140 to the infrared control device 120, and the TV 110 can encapsulate the boot command into data through BLE or Wi-Fi direct connection technology. The packet is sent to the infrared control device 120. After receiving the boot instruction, the infrared control device 120 can parse the boot instruction from the data packet, and determine the infrared code corresponding to the boot instruction (for example, "2x01"). Then, the infrared control device 120 can modulate the power-on infrared control signal, and send the power-on infrared control signal through the infrared transmitter.
S309、电视机110可以显示出机顶盒的直播频道信息。S309. The television 110 may display the live channel information of the set-top box.
在电视机110和机顶盒140都开机之后,电视机110可以将机顶盒EPG数据中的直播频道信息和电视机110上的点播视频信息,共同显示在电视机110上同一应用界面中,用户只需打开电视机110上的一个应用程序,即可观看直播频道和点播视频,使用户的操作更便捷。After the TV 110 and the set-top box 140 are turned on, the TV 110 can display the live channel information in the EPG data of the set-top box and the on-demand video information on the TV 110 together in the same application interface on the TV 110, and the user only needs to open An application on the TV 110 can watch live channels and on-demand videos, which makes the user's operation more convenient.
示例性的,如图4A所示,电视机100在开机之后,可以显示出主页应用界面410。该主页应用界面410可以包括标题选项栏411,包括我的频道选项,首页选项,直播选项412,电视选项,电影选项,综艺选项,儿童选项,专区选项,搜索选项,等等选项栏。其中,电视剧,电影,综艺,儿童专区等选项栏下的视频资源,可以是电视机110通过Internet从点播服务器上的获取的。当用户通过遥控器130选择该直播412选项栏后,电视机110可以显示出一个或多个直播频道选项。其中,直播频道选项上显示有直播频道当前播放的节目海报和节目名称。其中,电视机110可以从EPG数据中获取到直播频道当前播放的节目名称,然后根据节目名称从网络上的服务器获取到该节目名称对应的节目海报。Exemplarily, as shown in FIG. 4A, after the television 100 is turned on, the homepage application interface 410 may be displayed. The home page application interface 410 may include a title option bar 411, including my channel option, home page option, live broadcast option 412, TV option, movie option, variety show option, children option, special area option, search option, and so on. Among them, the video resources under the option columns of TV series, movies, variety shows, children's area, etc., may be obtained by the TV 110 from the on-demand server through the Internet. After the user selects the live broadcast 412 option bar through the remote control 130, the television 110 may display one or more live broadcast channel options. Among them, the live broadcast channel option displays the current program poster and the program name of the live broadcast channel. Wherein, the television 110 can obtain the name of the program currently played on the live channel from the EPG data, and then obtain the program poster corresponding to the program name from the server on the network according to the program name.
其中,该直播频道可以分类为央视频道(例如,CCTV-1,CCTV-2,CCTV-3,CCTV-5,等等)、卫视频道(例如,广东卫视,湖南卫视,浙江卫视,江苏卫视,等等)、地方频道(例如,江苏城市,江苏综艺,江苏影视,江苏财经)。Among them, the live broadcast channel can be classified into CCTV channels (for example, CCTV-1, CCTV-2, CCTV-3, CCTV-5, etc.), satellite TV channels (for example, Guangdong Satellite TV, Hunan Satellite TV, Zhejiang Satellite TV, Jiangsu Satellite TV, Etc.), local channels (for example, Jiangsu City, Jiangsu Variety Show, Jiangsu Film and Television, Jiangsu Finance).
S310、遥控器130可以接收用户针对第一频道的选择操作。S311、响应于针对第一频道的选择操作,遥控器130可以向电视机110发送针对第一频道的选择指令。S310. The remote controller 130 may receive a user's selection operation for the first channel. S311. In response to the selection operation for the first channel, the remote control 130 may send a selection instruction for the first channel to the television 110.
示例性的,如图4A所示,第一频道可以是湖南卫视,遥控器130可以通过一个或多个按键(例如“up”按键,“down”按键,“left”按键,“right”按键和“OK”按键)接收用户的选择操作,当用户按压遥控器130上的按键时,遥控器130可以发送按键指令给电视机110。电视机110根据遥控器130发送的选择框移动指令,移动选择框至第一频道选项上。在指针框移动至第一频道的选项上之后,遥控器130可以接收用户针对确认按键的输入操作,并发送确认指令给电视机110,电视机110即可确定用户选择的第一频道(例如湖南卫视)。Exemplarily, as shown in FIG. 4A, the first channel may be Hunan Satellite TV, and the remote control 130 may use one or more buttons (such as "up" button, "down" button, "left" button, "right" button and The “OK” button) receives the user's selection operation. When the user presses a button on the remote control 130, the remote control 130 can send a button instruction to the television 110. The TV 110 moves the selection box to the first channel option according to the selection box movement instruction sent by the remote control 130. After the pointer box is moved to the first channel option, the remote control 130 can receive the user's input operation on the confirmation button, and send a confirmation instruction to the TV 110, and the TV 110 can determine the first channel selected by the user (for example, Hunan Satellite TV).
在一种可能的实现方式中,遥控器130可以接收用户的语音输入(例如,“小艺小艺,我要看湖南卫视”)。遥控器130可以将用户输入的语音数据发送给电视机110。电视机110可以从该语音数据中,解析出用户的针对第一频道(例如湖南卫视)的选择指令。In a possible implementation, the remote control 130 can receive a user's voice input (for example, "Xiaoyi Xiaoyi, I want to watch Hunan Satellite TV"). The remote control 130 may send the voice data input by the user to the television 110. The television 110 can parse the user's selection instruction for the first channel (for example, Hunan Satellite TV) from the voice data.
示例性的,如图4A所示,遥控器130可以在用户按住语音输入按键132后,采集用户的语音数据。当用户说完“小艺小艺,我要看湖南卫视”,松开该语音输入按键132之后,遥控器130可以将采集到语音数据发送给电视机110。电视机110可以从语音数据中提取出关键词“湖南卫视”,即可确定出用户选择的第一频道为湖南卫视。上述示例仅仅用于解释本申请,不应构成限定。Exemplarily, as shown in FIG. 4A, the remote control 130 may collect the user's voice data after the user presses the voice input button 132. When the user finishes saying "Xiaoyi Xiaoyi, I want to watch Hunan Satellite TV", and after releasing the voice input button 132, the remote control 130 can send the collected voice data to the television 110. The television 110 can extract the keyword "Hunan Satellite TV" from the voice data, and can determine that the first channel selected by the user is Hunan Satellite TV. The above examples are only used to explain the application and should not constitute a limitation.
本申请实施例中,针对第一频道的选择指令可以称为第一控制指令,其他实施例也同样适用。In the embodiments of the present application, the selection instruction for the first channel may be referred to as the first control instruction, and other embodiments are also applicable.
S312、电视机110可以从红外码库中匹配出第一频道对应的红外码。S312. The television 110 can match the infrared code corresponding to the first channel from the infrared code library.
S313、电视机110可以将第一频道对应的红外码发送给红外控制设备120。S313. The television 110 may send the infrared code corresponding to the first channel to the infrared control device 120.
S314、红外控制设备120可以根据第一频道对应的红外码,向外发送第一频道对应的红外控制信号。S314. The infrared control device 120 may send out the infrared control signal corresponding to the first channel according to the infrared code corresponding to the first channel.
在电视机110接收到针对第一频道的选择指令后,电视机110可以从EPG数据中的频道列表,确定出第一频道的频道编号。然后,电视机110可以从红外码库中匹配出第一频道对应的红外码。电视机110可以将第一频道对应的红外码,通过BLE或WiFi直连,发送给红外控制设备120。红外控制设备120在接收到该红外码之后,可以根据该红外码调制出第一频道的红外控制信号,并向外发送该红外控制信号。After the television 110 receives the selection instruction for the first channel, the television 110 can determine the channel number of the first channel from the channel list in the EPG data. Then, the television 110 can match the infrared code corresponding to the first channel from the infrared code library. The television 110 may send the infrared code corresponding to the first channel to the infrared control device 120 through BLE or WiFi direct connection. After receiving the infrared code, the infrared control device 120 may modulate the infrared control signal of the first channel according to the infrared code, and send the infrared control signal to the outside.
示例性的,EPG数据中的频道列表可以如下表3所示:Exemplarily, the channel list in the EPG data may be as shown in Table 3 below:
表3table 3
频道名称Channel name 频道编号Channel number
……... ……...
湖南卫视 Hunan Satellite TV 023023
浙江卫视 Zhejiang Satellite TV 024024
广东卫视 Guangdong Satellite TV 025025
广西卫视Guangxi Satellite TV 026026
山东卫视Shandong Satellite TV 027027
山西卫视 Shanxi Satellite TV 028028
CCTV-1CCTV-1 029029
CCTV-2CCTV-2 030030
……... ……...
由上表3可知,“湖南卫视”的频道编号为“023”,“浙江卫视”的频道编号为“024”,“广东卫视”的频道编号为“025”,“广西卫视”的频道编号为“026”,“山东卫视”的频道编号为“027”,“山西卫视”的频道编号为“028”,“CCTV-1”的频道编号为“029”,“CCTV-2”的频道编号为“030”。上述表3所示示例仅仅用于解释本申请,不应构成限定。From Table 3 above, the channel number of "Hunan Satellite TV" is "023", the channel number of "Zhejiang Satellite TV" is "024", the channel number of "Guangdong Satellite TV" is "025", and the channel number of "Guangxi Satellite TV" is "026", the channel number of "Shandong Satellite TV" is "027", the channel number of "Shanxi Satellite TV" is "028", the channel number of "CCTV-1" is "029", and the channel number of "CCTV-2" is "030". The examples shown in Table 3 above are only used to explain this application and should not constitute a limitation.
其中,红外码库中频道编号与红外码的对应关系可以参考上述表2所示,在此不再赘述。Among them, the corresponding relationship between the channel number and the infrared code in the infrared code library can be referred to as shown in Table 2, which will not be repeated here.
本申请实施例中,第一频道对应的红外码可以称为第一红外码,其他实施例也同样适用。In the embodiments of the present application, the infrared code corresponding to the first channel may be referred to as the first infrared code, and other embodiments are also applicable.
S315、机顶盒140在接收到第一频道对应的红外控制信号后,可以获取第一频道的视频数据。S316、机顶盒140将第一频道的视频数据发送给电视机110。S315. After receiving the infrared control signal corresponding to the first channel, the set-top box 140 may obtain the video data of the first channel. S316. The set-top box 140 sends the video data of the first channel to the television 110.
其中,among them,
1、当机顶盒140为接收有线电视的数字机顶盒时,机顶盒140可以通过同轴电缆接收到广播电视网络发送的多个频道上的信号。在机顶盒140接收到第一频道对应的红外控制信号后,机顶盒140可以只解码出第一频道的视频数据,并将第一频道的视频数据通过 HDMI线或AV线发送给电视机110。1. When the set-top box 140 is a digital set-top box that receives cable television, the set-top box 140 can receive signals on multiple channels sent by a broadcast television network through a coaxial cable. After the set-top box 140 receives the infrared control signal corresponding to the first channel, the set-top box 140 can decode only the video data of the first channel, and send the video data of the first channel to the television 110 through the HDMI cable or the AV cable.
2、当机顶盒140为接收卫星电视的电视机的数字机顶盒时,机顶盒140上可以存储有各电视频道对应的卫星信号接收频段。在机顶盒140接收到第一频道对应的红外控制信号后,机顶盒140可以确定出第一频道对应的卫星信号接收频段,并在第一频道对应的卫星信号接收频段上接收卫星信号,进而从卫星信号中解码出第一频道的视频数据。在解码出第一频道的视频数据之后,机顶盒140可以将该第一频道的视频数据通过HDMI线或AV线发送给电视机110。2. When the set-top box 140 is a digital set-top box of a television that receives satellite television, the set-top box 140 may store the satellite signal receiving frequency band corresponding to each television channel. After the set-top box 140 receives the infrared control signal corresponding to the first channel, the set-top box 140 can determine the satellite signal receiving frequency band corresponding to the first channel, and receive the satellite signal on the satellite signal receiving frequency band corresponding to the first channel, and then receive the satellite signal Decode the video data of the first channel. After decoding the video data of the first channel, the set-top box 140 may send the video data of the first channel to the television 110 via the HDMI cable or the AV cable.
3、当机顶盒140为接收地面广播电视的数字机顶盒时,机顶盒140上可以存储有各电视频道对应的广播信号接收频段。在机顶盒140接收到第一频道对应的红外控制信号后,机顶盒140可以确定出第一频道对应的广播信号接收频段,并在第一频道对应的广播信号接收频段上接收广播信号,进而从该广播信号中解码出第一频道的视频数据。在解码出第一频道的视频数据之后,机顶盒140可以将该第一频道的视频数据通过HDMI线或AV线发送给电视机110。3. When the set-top box 140 is a digital set-top box that receives terrestrial broadcast television, the set-top box 140 may store the broadcast signal receiving frequency band corresponding to each television channel. After the set-top box 140 receives the infrared control signal corresponding to the first channel, the set-top box 140 can determine the broadcasting signal receiving frequency band corresponding to the first channel, and receive the broadcasting signal on the broadcasting signal receiving frequency band corresponding to the first channel, and then from the broadcasting signal. The video data of the first channel is decoded from the signal. After decoding the video data of the first channel, the set-top box 140 may send the video data of the first channel to the television 110 via the HDMI cable or the AV cable.
4、当机顶盒140为网络电视机顶盒时,在机顶盒140接收到第一频道对应的红外控制信号后,机顶盒140可以从Internet的服务器上下载第一频道正在直播的视频数据,并将第一频道正在直播的视频数据,通过HDMI线或AV线,发送给电视机110。4. When the set-top box 140 is a network TV set-top box, after the set-top box 140 receives the infrared control signal corresponding to the first channel, the set-top box 140 can download the live video data of the first channel from the Internet server, and set the first channel to be The live video data is sent to the television 110 through the HDMI cable or the AV cable.
S317、电视机110在接收到第一频道的视频数据之后,播放该第一频道的视频数据。S317. After receiving the video data of the first channel, the television 110 plays the video data of the first channel.
示例性的,如图4B所示,第一频道可以是“湖南卫视”。电视机110在接收到“湖南卫视”的视频数据之后,可以播放该“湖南卫视”的视频数据。其中,电视机110播放的视频画面中可以包括有第一频道的台标(例如,湖南卫视台标421)。Exemplarily, as shown in FIG. 4B, the first channel may be "Hunan Satellite TV". After the television 110 receives the video data of "Hunan Satellite TV", it can play the video data of "Hunan Satellite TV". Wherein, the video screen played by the television 110 may include the logo of the first channel (for example, the logo of Hunan Satellite TV 421).
其中,在本申请实施例中,当电视机110和机顶盒140在开机时,若电视机110接收到待机指令,电视机110可以在切换至待机状态的同时,通过红外控制设备140发送用于控制机顶盒140待机的红外控制信号给机顶盒140,以控制机顶盒140待机。这样,使电视机110同步待机,可以通过一个遥控器即可实现对电视机和机顶盒的同步待机控制,方便了用户的操作。Among them, in the embodiment of the present application, when the television 110 and the set-top box 140 are turned on, if the television 110 receives a standby instruction, the television 110 can switch to the standby state and simultaneously send a control signal through the infrared control device 140 The infrared control signal of the set-top box 140 standby is sent to the set-top box 140 to control the set-top box 140 to be standby. In this way, the synchronous standby of the TV 110 can be realized through a remote control to realize the synchronous standby control of the TV and the set-top box, which facilitates the operation of the user.
本申请实施例中,待机指令也可称为第三控制指令,待机指令对应的红外码可以称为第三红外码,其他实施例也同样适用。In the embodiments of the present application, the standby instruction may also be referred to as the third control instruction, and the infrared code corresponding to the standby instruction may be referred to as the third infrared code, and other embodiments are also applicable.
在一些应用场景中,电视机110正在播放机顶盒140发送的第一频道(例如湖南卫视)的视频数据时,可以通过遥控器130接收用户的切台操作,并通过红外控制设备120发送红外控制信号给红外机顶盒140,以使机顶盒140切台至第二频道。这样,可以实现用户只需在单个遥控器上输入操作指令,就能完成对机顶盒的切台控制。并且,即使机顶盒和电视机相对于遥控器而言在不同的方向上,也不需要用户在输入操作指令时,刻意的将遥控器对准某一个方向,实现了遥控器在任一方向上,都能完成对机顶盒的切台控制。简化了用户的操作过程,提高了用户体验。In some application scenarios, when the TV 110 is playing the video data of the first channel (for example, Hunan Satellite TV) sent by the set-top box 140, it can receive the user's switch operation through the remote control 130, and send the infrared control signal through the infrared control device 120 Give the infrared set-top box 140 so that the set-top box 140 switches to the second channel. In this way, it can be realized that the user only needs to input operation instructions on a single remote control to complete the cutting control of the set-top box. Moreover, even if the set-top box and the TV are in different directions relative to the remote control, there is no need for the user to deliberately point the remote control in a certain direction when inputting operating instructions, so that the remote control can be in any direction. Complete the cutting control of the set top box. Simplifies the user's operation process and improves the user experience.
示例性的,如图5A所示,电视机110可以与遥控器130建立无线连接(例如蓝牙低功 耗(BLE)连接),电视机110可以与红外控制设备120建立无线连接(例如BLE连接或Wi-Fi direct连接),电视机110与机顶盒140可以通过HDMI线/AV线建立有线连接,红外控制设备120可以通过红外线向机顶盒140发送控制指令。其中,电视机110上下载有机顶盒140对应的红外码库与EPG数据。Exemplarily, as shown in FIG. 5A, the TV 110 may establish a wireless connection with the remote control 130 (for example, a Bluetooth low energy (BLE) connection), and the TV 110 may establish a wireless connection with the infrared control device 120 (for example, a BLE connection or Wi-Fi direct connection), the TV 110 and the set-top box 140 may establish a wired connection through an HDMI cable/AV cable, and the infrared control device 120 may send a control command to the set-top box 140 through infrared rays. Among them, the infrared code library and EPG data corresponding to the organic top box 140 are downloaded to the television 110.
如图5A所示,当前电视机110正在播放湖南卫视的节目视频。其中,该湖南卫视的节目视频由机顶盒140通过HDMI线或AV线发送给电视机110。电视机110显示出湖南卫视的节目视频画面510,该节目视频画面510中包括有湖南卫视的台标511。As shown in FIG. 5A, the television 110 is currently playing a program video of Hunan Satellite TV. Wherein, the program video of Hunan Satellite TV is sent by the set-top box 140 to the television 110 through the HDMI cable or the AV cable. The television 110 displays a program video screen 510 of Hunan Satellite TV, and the program video screen 510 includes the station logo 511 of Hunan Satellite TV.
遥控器130可以接收用户针对“up”(频道加)按键的输入操作(例如单击),响应于该针对“up”(频道加)按键的输入操作,遥控器130可以将该“up”按键对应的控制指令封装成数据包,发送给电视机110。The remote control 130 can receive the user's input operation (for example, click) on the "up" (channel plus) button. In response to the input operation on the "up" (channel plus) button, the remote control 130 can press the "up" button. The corresponding control instruction is encapsulated into a data packet and sent to the television 110.
电视机110在接收该“up”(频道加)按键对应的控制指令后,可以确定电视机110当前直播频道的频道编号。其中,电视机110可以通过如下方式确定当前直播频道的频道编号:电视机110从当前直播频道的播放画面中截取电视台的台标,并将该台标上传至频道识别服务器160上。频道识别服务器160可以识别出该台标对应的频道编号,并返回频道编号给电视机110。The television 110 can determine the channel number of the current live broadcast channel of the television 110 after receiving the control command corresponding to the "up" (channel plus) button. The TV 110 can determine the channel number of the current live channel in the following manner: the TV 110 intercepts the TV station logo from the broadcast screen of the current live channel, and uploads the logo to the channel identification server 160. The channel identification server 160 can identify the channel number corresponding to the logo, and return the channel number to the television 110.
电视机110在确定当前直播频道的频道编号后,可以根据“up”按键对应的控制指令,确定出切台后直播频道的频道编号。例如,当前直播频道为“湖南卫视”,频道编号为“023”。“up”(频道加)按键对应的控制指令为切换至当前直播频道的下一个直播频道。电视机110从EPG数据中的频道列表中,查询到“湖南卫视”(频道编号为“023”)的下一个直播频道为“浙江卫视”(其频道编号为“024”),即第二频道为“浙江卫视”,频道编号为“024”。After the TV 110 determines the channel number of the current live channel, it can determine the channel number of the live channel after the channel is cut according to the control command corresponding to the "up" button. For example, the current live broadcast channel is "Hunan Satellite TV" and the channel number is "023". The control command corresponding to the "up" (channel plus) button is to switch to the next live channel of the current live channel. From the channel list in the EPG data, the TV 110 finds that the next live channel of "Hunan Satellite TV" (channel number is "023") is "Zhejiang Satellite TV" (the channel number is "024"), which is the second channel It is "Zhejiang Satellite TV" and the channel number is "024".
电视机110可以从下载的红外码库中,查询到第二频道对应的红外码,并将该红外码通过BLE或者Wi-Fi直连,发送给红外控制设备120。The television 110 can query the infrared code corresponding to the second channel from the downloaded infrared code library, and send the infrared code to the infrared control device 120 through BLE or Wi-Fi direct connection.
示例性的,红外码库中频道编号与红外码的对应关系可以如下4所示:Exemplarily, the corresponding relationship between the channel number and the infrared code in the infrared code library can be shown as follows:
表4Table 4
频道编号Channel number 红外码Infrared code
……... ……...
023023 2x27 2x27
024024 2x28 2x28
025025 2x292x29
026026 2x302x30
027027 2x31 2x31
028028 2x32 2x32
029029 2x33 2x33
030030 2x342x34
……... ……...
由上述表4可以看出,频道编号“023”对应的红外码为“2x27”,频道编号“024”对应的红外码为“2x28”,频道编号“025”对应的红外码为“2x29”,频道编号“026”对应的红 外码为“2x30”,频道编号“027”对应的红外码为“2x31”,频道编号“028”对应的红外码为“2x32”,频道编号“029”对应的红外码为“2x33”,频道编号“030”对应的红外码为“2x34”。例如,第二频道的频道编号为“024”,则第二频道对应的红外码为“2x28”。其中,上述表4仅仅示例性的示出了一部分频道编号及其对应的红外码,具体实现中,红外码库可以包括有更多频道编号及其对应的红外码,在此不作限定。It can be seen from Table 4 above that the infrared code corresponding to channel number "023" is "2x27", the infrared code corresponding to channel number "024" is "2x28", and the infrared code corresponding to channel number "025" is "2x29". The infrared code corresponding to channel number "026" is "2x30", the infrared code corresponding to channel number "027" is "2x31", the infrared code corresponding to channel number "028" is "2x32", and the infrared code corresponding to channel number "029" The code is "2x33", and the infrared code corresponding to the channel number "030" is "2x34". For example, if the channel number of the second channel is "024", the infrared code corresponding to the second channel is "2x28". Among them, the above Table 4 only exemplarily shows a part of channel numbers and their corresponding infrared codes. In specific implementation, the infrared code library may include more channel numbers and their corresponding infrared codes, which is not limited here.
红外控制设备120在接收到第二频道(例如“浙江卫视”)对应的红外码(例如“2x28”)后,红外控制设备120可以根据该接收到的红外码(例如“2x28”),调制出第二频道对应的红外控制信号,并通过红外发射器发送该第二频道(例如“浙江卫视”)的红外控制信号。After the infrared control device 120 receives the infrared code (for example, "2x28") corresponding to the second channel (for example, "Zhejiang Satellite TV"), the infrared control device 120 can modulate according to the received infrared code (for example, "2x28") The infrared control signal corresponding to the second channel, and the infrared control signal of the second channel (such as "Zhejiang Satellite TV") is sent through an infrared transmitter.
机顶盒140在接收到第二频道对应的红外控制信号后,可以获取第二频道的视频数据。其中:After receiving the infrared control signal corresponding to the second channel, the set-top box 140 can obtain the video data of the second channel. among them:
1、当机顶盒140为接收有线电视的数字机顶盒时,机顶盒140可以通过同轴电缆接收到广播电视网络发送的多个频道上的信号。在机顶盒140接收到第二频道对应的红外控制信号后,机顶盒140可以只解码出第二频道的视频数据,并将第二频道的视频数据通过HDMI线或AV线发送给电视机110。1. When the set-top box 140 is a digital set-top box that receives cable television, the set-top box 140 can receive signals on multiple channels sent by a broadcast television network through a coaxial cable. After the set-top box 140 receives the infrared control signal corresponding to the second channel, the set-top box 140 may decode only the video data of the second channel, and send the video data of the second channel to the television 110 via the HDMI cable or the AV cable.
2、当机顶盒140为接收卫星电视的电视机的数字机顶盒时,机顶盒140上可以存储有各电视频道对应的卫星信号接收频段。在机顶盒140接收到第二频道对应的红外控制信号后,机顶盒140可以确定出第二频道对应的卫星信号接收频段,并在第二频道对应的卫星信号接收频段上接收卫星信号,进而从卫星信号中解码出第二频道的视频数据。在解码出第二频道的视频数据之后,机顶盒140可以将该第二频道的视频数据通过HDMI线或AV线发送给电视机110。2. When the set-top box 140 is a digital set-top box of a television that receives satellite television, the set-top box 140 may store the satellite signal receiving frequency band corresponding to each television channel. After the set-top box 140 receives the infrared control signal corresponding to the second channel, the set-top box 140 can determine the satellite signal receiving frequency band corresponding to the second channel, and receive the satellite signal on the satellite signal receiving frequency band corresponding to the second channel, and then receive the satellite signal Decode the video data of the second channel. After decoding the video data of the second channel, the set-top box 140 may send the video data of the second channel to the television 110 via the HDMI cable or the AV cable.
3、当机顶盒140为接收地面广播电视的数字机顶盒时,机顶盒140上可以存储有各电视频道对应的广播信号接收频段。在机顶盒140接收到第二频道对应的红外控制信号后,机顶盒140可以确定出第二频道对应的广播信号接收频段,并在第二频道对应的广播信号接收频段上接收广播信号,进而从该广播信号中解码出第二频道的视频数据。在解码出第二频道的视频数据之后,机顶盒140可以将该第二频道的视频数据通过HDMI线或AV线发送给电视机110。3. When the set-top box 140 is a digital set-top box that receives terrestrial broadcast television, the set-top box 140 may store the broadcast signal receiving frequency band corresponding to each television channel. After the set-top box 140 receives the infrared control signal corresponding to the second channel, the set-top box 140 can determine the broadcasting signal receiving frequency band corresponding to the second channel, and receive the broadcasting signal on the broadcasting signal receiving frequency band corresponding to the second channel, and then from the broadcasting signal. The video data of the second channel is decoded from the signal. After decoding the video data of the second channel, the set-top box 140 may send the video data of the second channel to the television 110 via the HDMI cable or the AV cable.
4、当机顶盒140为网络电视机顶盒时,在机顶盒140接收到第二频道对应的红外控制信号后,机顶盒140可以从Internet的服务器上下载第二频道正在直播的视频数据,并将第二频道正在直播的视频数据,通过HDMI线或AV线,发送给电视机110。4. When the set-top box 140 is a network TV set-top box, after the set-top box 140 receives the infrared control signal corresponding to the second channel, the set-top box 140 can download the live video data of the second channel from the Internet server, and set the second channel to The live video data is sent to the television 110 through the HDMI cable or the AV cable.
可以理解的,电视机110在通过遥控器130接收到用户输入的切台指令(例如频道加、频道减)后,可以将该切台操作对应的遥控码发送给红外控制设备120。红外控制设备120可以将该遥控码调制出红外控制信号并向外辐射发送。机顶盒140接收到该红外控制信号后,可以解析出该切台指令,并根据该切台指令以及第一频道的频道号,确定出预计切台至第二频道的频道号,并接收该第二频道的视频数据。It is understandable that after the television 110 receives a channel cut instruction (such as channel addition, channel reduction) input by the user through the remote control 130, it can send the remote control code corresponding to the channel cut operation to the infrared control device 120. The infrared control device 120 can modulate the remote control code into an infrared control signal and radiate it outward. After the set-top box 140 receives the infrared control signal, it can parse out the channel cut command, and according to the channel cut command and the channel number of the first channel, determine the channel number expected to switch to the second channel, and receive the second channel. The video data of the channel.
本申请实施例中,切台指令可以称为第四控制指令,切台后的第二频道对应的红外码可以称为第四红外码,切台指令(例如“频道加”指令/或“频道减”指令)对应的红外码可以称为第五红外码,其他实施例中也同样适用。In the embodiment of the present application, the channel cut instruction may be called the fourth control instruction, the infrared code corresponding to the second channel after the channel cut may be called the fourth infrared code, and the channel cut instruction (such as "channel plus" instruction/or "channel The infrared code corresponding to the “minus” instruction) may be referred to as the fifth infrared code, which is also applicable in other embodiments.
电视机110在接收到第二频道(例如“浙江卫视”)的视频数据之后,播放该第二频道的视频数据。After the television 110 receives the video data of the second channel (for example, "Zhejiang Satellite TV"), it plays the video data of the second channel.
示例性的,如图5B所示,第二频道可以是“浙江卫视”。电视机110在接收到“浙江卫视”的视频数据之后,可以播放该“浙江卫视”的视频数据。其中,第二频道(例如“浙江卫视”)的视频画面520中可以包括有第二频道的台标(例如,“浙江卫视”台标521)。Exemplarily, as shown in FIG. 5B, the second channel may be "Zhejiang Satellite TV". After the television 110 receives the video data of "Zhejiang Satellite TV", it can play the video data of the "Zhejiang Satellite TV". The video screen 520 of the second channel (for example, "Zhejiang Satellite TV") may include the station logo of the second channel (for example, the "Zhejiang Satellite TV" logo 521).
在一种可能的实现方式中,当前电视机110正在播放第一频道的视频数据时,电视机110可以通过遥控器130接收用户的输入操作(例如点击遥控器130上的“菜单”按键),显示频道列表。其中,频道列表中包括有多个频道选项,频道选项上可以显示有频道名称及频道编号。电视机110可以通过遥控器130接收用户针对频道列表中第二频道选项的选择输入,响应于该选择输入,电视机110可以通过红外控制设备120,控制机顶盒140切台至第二频道。In a possible implementation manner, when the TV 110 is currently playing the video data of the first channel, the TV 110 can receive the input operation of the user through the remote control 130 (for example, click the "menu" button on the remote control 130), Display the channel list. Among them, the channel list includes multiple channel options, and the channel name and channel number can be displayed on the channel options. The TV 110 can receive the user's selection input for the second channel option in the channel list through the remote control 130. In response to the selection input, the TV 110 can control the set-top box 140 to switch to the second channel through the infrared control device 120.
示例性的,如图6A所示,当前电视机110正在播放湖南卫视的节目视频。其中,该湖南卫视的节目视频由机顶盒140通过HDMI线或AV线发送给电视机110。电视机110显示出湖南卫视的节目视频画面510,该节目视频画面510中包括有湖南卫视的台标511。其中,图6A中所示的节目视频画面510与上述图5A中所示的节目视频画面510相同。Exemplarily, as shown in FIG. 6A, the television 110 is currently playing a program video of Hunan Satellite TV. Wherein, the program video of Hunan Satellite TV is sent by the set-top box 140 to the television 110 through the HDMI cable or the AV cable. The television 110 displays a program video screen 510 of Hunan Satellite TV, and the program video screen 510 includes the station logo 511 of Hunan Satellite TV. Wherein, the program video screen 510 shown in FIG. 6A is the same as the program video screen 510 shown in FIG. 5A.
遥控器130可以接收用户针对菜单按键136的输入操作(例如单击),响应于该针对菜单按键136的输入操作,遥控器130可以将该菜单按键136对应的控制指令封装成数据包,发送给电视机110。The remote control 130 can receive the user's input operation (for example, click) on the menu button 136. In response to the input operation on the menu button 136, the remote control 130 can encapsulate the control command corresponding to the menu button 136 into a data packet and send it to Television 110.
如图6B所示,电视机110在接收到菜单按键136对应的控制指令后,可以显示出频道列表530。其中,该频道列表中包括有一个或多个频道选项(例如“湖南卫视”选项,“浙江卫视”选项,“广东卫视”选项,“广西卫视”选项,“山东卫视”选项,“山西卫视”选项,“CCTV-1”选项,“CCTV-2”选项,等等)。其中,频道选项上可以显示有频道名称及频道编号。由于当前电视机110正在播放“湖南卫视”的视频数据,因此,选择框531的起始位置可以是在“湖南为卫视”选项上。As shown in FIG. 6B, the television 110 may display the channel list 530 after receiving the control instruction corresponding to the menu button 136. Among them, the channel list includes one or more channel options (such as "Hunan Satellite TV" option, "Zhejiang Satellite TV" option, "Guangdong Satellite TV" option, "Guangxi Satellite TV" option, "Shandong Satellite TV" option, "Shanxi Satellite TV" option Option, "CCTV-1" option, "CCTV-2" option, etc.). Among them, the channel name and channel number can be displayed on the channel option. Since the television 110 is currently playing the video data of "Hunan Satellite TV", the starting position of the selection box 531 may be on the "Hunan Satellite TV" option.
其中,电视机110可以通过遥控器130接收用户的输入操作(例如通过一次或多次按压遥控器130上的“up”按键或“down”按键),如图6C所示,响应于该输入操作,电视机110可以移动选择框531的位置至第二频道选项(例如“CCTV-1”选项)上。Wherein, the television 110 may receive the user's input operation through the remote control 130 (for example, by pressing the "up" button or the "down" button on the remote control 130 one or more times), as shown in FIG. 6C, in response to the input operation , The television 110 can move the position of the selection frame 531 to the second channel option (for example, the "CCTV-1" option).
在选择框531的位置处于第二频道选项上时,当遥控器130接收到用户针对第二频道选项(例如“CCTV-1”选项)的确认操作(例如按压“ok”键)之后,遥控器130可以向电视机110发送确认指令。When the position of the selection box 531 is on the second channel option, after the remote control 130 receives the user's confirmation operation (for example, pressing the "ok" key) for the second channel option (for example, the "CCTV-1" option), the remote control 130 may send a confirmation instruction to the television 110.
电视机110在接收到确认指令后,可以从下载的红外码库中,根据第二频道的频道编号(例如“029”),确定出第二频道对应的红外码(例如“2x33”),并将该红外码通过BLE或者Wi-Fi,发送给红外控制设备120。After the television 110 receives the confirmation command, it can determine the infrared code corresponding to the second channel (such as "2x33") from the downloaded infrared code library according to the channel number of the second channel (such as "029"), and The infrared code is sent to the infrared control device 120 via BLE or Wi-Fi.
红外控制设备120在接收到第二频道(例如“CCTV-1”)对应的红外码(例如“0x33”)后,红外控制设备120可以根据该接收到的红外码(例如“2x33”),调制出第二频道(例如“CCTV-1”)对应的红外控制信号,并通过红外发射器发送该第二频道(例如“CCTV-1”)的红外控制信号。After the infrared control device 120 receives the infrared code (for example, "0x33") corresponding to the second channel (for example, "CCTV-1"), the infrared control device 120 can modulate according to the received infrared code (for example, "2x33") The infrared control signal corresponding to the second channel (for example, "CCTV-1") is output, and the infrared control signal of the second channel (for example, "CCTV-1") is sent through an infrared transmitter.
机顶盒140在接收到第二频道对应的红外控制信号后,可以获取第二频道的视频数据。其中,具体内容可以参考前述图5A至图5B所示实施例,在此不再赘述。After receiving the infrared control signal corresponding to the second channel, the set-top box 140 can obtain the video data of the second channel. For specific content, reference may be made to the embodiments shown in FIG. 5A to FIG. 5B, which will not be repeated here.
电视机110在接收到第二频道(例如“CCTV-1”)的视频数据之后,播放该第二频道的视频数据。After the television 110 receives the video data of the second channel (for example, "CCTV-1"), it plays the video data of the second channel.
示例性的,如图6D所示,第二频道可以是“CCTV-1”。电视机110在接收到“CCTV-1”的视频数据之后,可以播放该“CCTV-1””的视频数据。其中,第二频道(例如“CCTV-1”)的视频画面540中可以包括有第二频道的台标(例如,“CCTV-1”台标541)。Exemplarily, as shown in FIG. 6D, the second channel may be "CCTV-1". After the television 110 receives the video data of "CCTV-1", it can play the video data of "CCTV-1". Among them, the video screen 540 of the second channel (for example, "CCTV-1") may include The station logo of the second channel (for example, "CCTV-1" station logo 541).
需要说明的是,在本申请的实施例中,红外控制设备120的产品形态不作限定,其中,该红外控制设备120可以是上述图6A所示的蓝牙音箱等产品形态的设备,也可以是如图6B所示的同时具有蓝牙/Wi-Fi通信、红外通信功能的控制设备。红外控制设备120还可以与电视机110为一体,等等。It should be noted that, in the embodiment of the present application, the product form of the infrared control device 120 is not limited. The infrared control device 120 may be a device in the form of a product such as a Bluetooth speaker shown in FIG. 6A, or may be such as The control device shown in Fig. 6B has both Bluetooth/Wi-Fi communication and infrared communication functions. The infrared control device 120 can also be integrated with the TV 110, and so on.
在一些应用场景中,当前机顶盒140正在将第一频道的视频数据发送给电视机110上播放。电视机110可以接收用户输入的控制指令(例如,电视机110可以通过采集用户的语音信号,将语音信号转换为控制指令),通过红外控制设备120,控制机顶盒140完成切换直播频道(例如切换至第二频道)等操作。其中,电视机110上可以有音频采集装置,可以采集用户的语音信号。在一种可能的实现方式中,电视机110也可以通过带有音频采集装置的遥控器110采集用户的语音信号。In some application scenarios, the current set-top box 140 is sending the video data of the first channel to the television 110 for playing. The TV 110 can receive a control instruction input by the user (for example, the TV 110 can collect the user's voice signal and convert the voice signal into a control instruction), and through the infrared control device 120, control the set-top box 140 to switch the live channel (for example, switch to Channel 2) and other operations. Among them, the television 110 may have an audio collection device, which can collect the user's voice signal. In a possible implementation manner, the TV set 110 may also collect the user's voice signal through the remote control 110 with an audio collecting device.
示例性的,如图7A所示,遥控器130上有音频采集装置(例如麦克风),在遥控器130接收到用户用于触发语音输入按键132的输入操作(例如按压)时,遥控器130可以采集用户输入的语音(例如“小艺小艺,我要看CCTV-1”),并将用户的输入的语音转换成语音信号发送给电视机110。Exemplarily, as shown in FIG. 7A, there is an audio collection device (for example, a microphone) on the remote control 130. When the remote control 130 receives an input operation (for example, pressing) for triggering the voice input button 132 by the user, the remote control 130 may The voice input by the user is collected (for example, "Xiaoyi Xiaoyi, I want to watch CCTV-1"), and the voice input by the user is converted into a voice signal and sent to the television 110.
电视机110在接收到遥控器130发送的语音信号后,可以解析出控制指令(例如切换直播频道至“CCTV-1”)。电视机110可以根据该控制指令,从EPG数据的频道列表中,确定出切台后第二频道(例如“CCTV-1”)的频道编号(例如为“029”)。电视机110可以根据第二频道的频道编号,从红外码库中确定出第二频道对应的红外码(例如“2x33”),并将该红外码通过BLE或者Wi-Fi发送给红外控制设备120。After the television 110 receives the voice signal sent by the remote control 130, it can parse out the control instruction (for example, switch the live channel to "CCTV-1"). The TV 110 can determine the channel number (for example, "029") of the second channel (for example, "CCTV-1") after the channel cut from the channel list of the EPG data according to the control instruction. The television 110 can determine the infrared code (for example, "2x33") corresponding to the second channel from the infrared code library according to the channel number of the second channel, and send the infrared code to the infrared control device 120 via BLE or Wi-Fi. .
红外控制设备120在接收到第二频道(例如“CCTV-1”)对应的红外码(例如“0x33”)后,红外控制设备120可以根据该接收到的红外码(例如“2x33”),调制出第二频道(例如“CCTV-1”)对应的红外控制信号,并通过红外发射器发送该第二频道(例如“CCTV-1”)的红外控制信号。After the infrared control device 120 receives the infrared code (for example, "0x33") corresponding to the second channel (for example, "CCTV-1"), the infrared control device 120 can modulate according to the received infrared code (for example, "2x33") The infrared control signal corresponding to the second channel (for example, "CCTV-1") is output, and the infrared control signal of the second channel (for example, "CCTV-1") is sent through an infrared transmitter.
机顶盒140在接收到第二频道对应的红外控制信号后,可以获取第二频道的视频数据。其中,具体内容可以参考前述图5A至图5B所示实施例,在此不再赘述。After receiving the infrared control signal corresponding to the second channel, the set-top box 140 can obtain the video data of the second channel. For specific content, reference may be made to the embodiments shown in FIG. 5A to FIG. 5B, which will not be repeated here.
电视机110在接收到第二频道(例如“CCTV-1”)的视频数据之后,播放该第二频道的视频数据。示例性的,如图7B所示,第二频道可以是“CCTV-1”。电视机110在接收到“CCTV-1”的视频数据之后,可以播放该“CCTV-1””的视频数据。其中,第二频道(例如“CCTV-1”)的视频画面540中可以包括有第二频道的台标(例如,“CCTV-1”台标541)。After the television 110 receives the video data of the second channel (for example, "CCTV-1"), it plays the video data of the second channel. Exemplarily, as shown in FIG. 7B, the second channel may be "CCTV-1". After the television 110 receives the video data of "CCTV-1", it can play the video data of "CCTV-1". Among them, the video screen 540 of the second channel (for example, "CCTV-1") may include The station logo of the second channel (for example, "CCTV-1" station logo 541).
在一种可能的实现方式中,红外控制设备120可以支持语音输入。例如,红外控制设备120可以为智能音箱等支持语音输入的设备。电视机110在下载红外码库和EPG数据之后,可以将红外码库和EPG数据发送到红外控制设备120上存储。红外控制设备120可以采集用户的语音信号,将语音信号转换为控制指令,并通过红外发射器发送红外控制信号给机顶盒140,以控制机顶盒140完成切换直播频道(例如切换至第二频道)等操作。In a possible implementation manner, the infrared control device 120 may support voice input. For example, the infrared control device 120 may be a device that supports voice input, such as a smart speaker. After the television 110 downloads the infrared code library and EPG data, it may send the infrared code library and EPG data to the infrared control device 120 for storage. The infrared control device 120 can collect the user's voice signal, convert the voice signal into control instructions, and send an infrared control signal to the set-top box 140 through an infrared transmitter to control the set-top box 140 to complete operations such as switching the live channel (for example, switching to the second channel) .
示例性的,如图8A所示,红外控制设备120可以采集用户输入的语音(例如“小艺小艺,我要看CCTV-1”)。红外控制设备120可以从用户输入的语音中解析出控制指令(例如切换直播频道至“CCTV-1”)。红外控制设备120可以根据该控制指令,从EPG数据的频道列表中,确定出切台后第二频道(例如“CCTV-1”)的频道编号(例如为“029”)。红外控制设备120可以根据第二频道的频道编号,从红外码库中确定出第二频道对应的红外码(例如“2x33”),并根据该红外码(例如“2x33”),调制出第二频道对应的红外控制信号,并通过红外发射器发送该第二频道的红外控制信号。Exemplarily, as shown in FIG. 8A, the infrared control device 120 may collect the voice input by the user (for example, "Xiaoyi Xiaoyi, I want to watch CCTV-1"). The infrared control device 120 can parse the control instruction (for example, switch the live channel to "CCTV-1") from the voice input by the user. The infrared control device 120 can determine the channel number (for example, "029") of the second channel (for example, "CCTV-1") after switching from the channel list of the EPG data according to the control instruction. The infrared control device 120 can determine the infrared code corresponding to the second channel (for example, "2x33") from the infrared code library according to the channel number of the second channel, and modulate the second channel according to the infrared code (for example, "2x33") The infrared control signal corresponding to the channel, and the infrared control signal of the second channel is sent through the infrared transmitter.
机顶盒140在接收到第二频道对应的红外控制信号后,可以获取第二频道的视频数据。其中,具体内容可以参考前述图5A至图5B所示实施例,在此不再赘述。After receiving the infrared control signal corresponding to the second channel, the set-top box 140 can obtain the video data of the second channel. For specific content, reference may be made to the embodiments shown in FIG. 5A to FIG. 5B, which will not be repeated here.
电视机110在接收到第二频道(例如“CCTV-1”)的视频数据之后,播放该第二频道的视频数据。示例性的,如上图8B所示,第二频道可以是“CCTV-1”。电视机110在接收到“CCTV-1”的视频数据之后,可以播放该“CCTV-1””的视频数据。其中,第二频道(例如“CCTV-1”)的视频画面540中可以包括有第二频道的台标(例如,“CCTV-1”台标541)。After the television 110 receives the video data of the second channel (for example, "CCTV-1"), it plays the video data of the second channel. Exemplarily, as shown in Figure 8B above, the second channel may be "CCTV-1". After the television 110 receives the video data of "CCTV-1", it can play the video data of "CCTV-1". Among them, the video screen 540 of the second channel (for example, "CCTV-1") may include The station logo of the second channel (for example, "CCTV-1" station logo 541).
在一种可能的实现方式中,为了节省具有语音功能的设备的功耗,电视机110可以通过语音唤醒词开启语音控制功能,红外控制设备120也可以通过语音唤醒词开启语音控制功能。当电视机110的语音唤醒词与红外控制设备120的语音唤醒词相同时,电视机110可以优先开启语音唤醒功能,采集用户的语音信号,执行用户的语音控制指令。这样,可以防止电视机110和红外控制设备120重复执行用户的语音控制指令,节省了红外控制设备120的功耗。In a possible implementation manner, in order to save the power consumption of the device with voice function, the television 110 may enable the voice control function through a voice wake-up word, and the infrared control device 120 may also enable the voice control function through a voice wake-up word. When the voice wake-up word of the television 110 is the same as the voice wake-up word of the infrared control device 120, the television 110 may preferentially turn on the voice wake-up function, collect the user's voice signal, and execute the user's voice control instruction. In this way, the television 110 and the infrared control device 120 can be prevented from repeatedly executing the user's voice control instructions, and the power consumption of the infrared control device 120 can be saved.
其中,当电视机110与红外控制设备120建立连接时,红外控制设备120可以获取电视机110的语音唤醒词,当红外控制设备120的语音唤醒词与电视机110的语音唤醒词相同时,红外控制设备120在采集到用户输入的语音唤醒词时,可以发送唤醒请求给电视机110,若电视机110未采集到语音唤醒词时,电视机110可以返回确认给红外控制设备120,红外控制设备120可以开启语音唤醒功能,采集用户的语音,执行用户的语音控制指令。当电视机110已采集到语音唤醒词时,电视机110可以开启语音唤醒功能,采集用户的语音,执行的语音控制指令。Wherein, when the TV 110 and the infrared control device 120 establish a connection, the infrared control device 120 can obtain the voice wake-up words of the television 110. When the voice wake-up words of the infrared control device 120 are the same as the voice wake-up words of the television 110, the infrared control device 120 When the control device 120 collects the voice wake-up word input by the user, it can send a wake-up request to the TV 110. If the TV 110 does not collect the voice wake-up word, the TV 110 can return confirmation to the infrared control device 120. The infrared control device 120 can turn on the voice wake-up function, collect the user's voice, and execute the user's voice control instructions. When the TV 110 has collected the voice wake-up word, the TV 110 can turn on the voice wake-up function, collect the user's voice, and execute the voice control instruction.
在一种可能的实现方式中,当电视机110接收用户的语音输入,同时匹配出直播频道的视频节目时和点播视频的节目时,电视机110可以优先返回直播频道的节目。例如,用户输入的语音内容可以为“小艺小艺,我要看跑男”。电视机110在解析出关键词“跑男”之后,可以从EPG数据中,搜索当前正在播放“跑男”节目的直播频道,同时,可以从网络服务器上搜索“跑男”节目的点播视频。若当前存在有正在播放“跑男”节目的直播频道, 电视机110可以通过红外控制设备120,控制机顶盒140切换至该正在播放“跑男”节目的直播频道。若当前不存在有正在播放“跑男”节目的直播频道时,电视机110可以显示包括有“跑男”节目的点播视频的页面。这样,电视机110在用户进行语音搜索节目时,优先返回匹配的直播内容给用户,可以提高用户的观看体验。In a possible implementation manner, when the TV 110 receives the user's voice input and simultaneously matches the video program of the live channel and when the video program is ordered, the TV 110 may preferentially return to the program of the live channel. For example, the voice content input by the user may be "Xiaoyi Xiaoyi, I want to watch running man". After the TV 110 parses out the keyword "running man", it can search the live channel currently playing the "running man" program from the EPG data, and at the same time, can search the on-demand video of the "running man" program from the network server. If there is currently a live channel that is playing the "running man" program, the television 110 can control the set-top box 140 through the infrared control device 120 to switch to the live channel of the "running man" program. If there is no live channel currently playing the "Running Man" program, the television 110 may display a page that includes the on-demand video of the "Running Man" program. In this way, when the user searches for a program by voice, the television 110 preferentially returns matching live content to the user, which can improve the user's viewing experience.
在一种应用场景中,红外控制设备120上可以配置有多个红外发射器,以使红外控制设备120可以在各方向上发射红外控制信号。这样,用户不用刻意摆放红外控制设备120的位置方向,只用将红外控制设备120摆放在机顶盒140附近且保证无障碍物格挡,即可实现对机顶盒140的遥控。In an application scenario, the infrared control device 120 may be equipped with multiple infrared transmitters, so that the infrared control device 120 can emit infrared control signals in all directions. In this way, the user does not need to deliberately place the position and direction of the infrared control device 120, and only needs to place the infrared control device 120 near the set-top box 140 and ensure that no obstacles are blocked, so as to realize the remote control of the set-top box 140.
示例性的,如图9所示,红外控制设备120上可以包括有8个红外发射器,例如红外发射器124A,红外发射器124B,红外发射器124C,红外发射器124D,红外发射器124E,红外发射器124F,红外发射器124G,红外发射器124H。红外控制设备120在接收到电视机110发送的红外码时,可以根据该红外码,调制出红外控制信号,并通过这8个红外发射器同时向外发送。这样,机顶盒140处于红外控制设备120的水平位置的哪个方向上,都能接收到红外控制设备120发送的红外控制信号,降低了用户对红外控制设备120与机顶盒140的摆放难度。Exemplarily, as shown in FIG. 9, the infrared control device 120 may include 8 infrared transmitters, such as infrared transmitter 124A, infrared transmitter 124B, infrared transmitter 124C, infrared transmitter 124D, and infrared transmitter 124E. Infrared transmitter 124F, infrared transmitter 124G, infrared transmitter 124H. When the infrared control device 120 receives the infrared code sent by the television 110, it can modulate an infrared control signal according to the infrared code, and send it to the outside simultaneously through the eight infrared transmitters. In this way, the set-top box 140 can receive the infrared control signal sent by the infrared control device 120 in any direction of the horizontal position of the infrared control device 120, which reduces the user's difficulty in placing the infrared control device 120 and the set-top box 140.
在一种可能的实现方式中,当电视机110开机时,红外控制设备120可以接收电视机110发送的开机红外码。红外控制设备120可以根据该开机红外码,调制出开机红外控制信号,并依次通过不同的红外发射器发送该开机红外控制信号,直至机顶盒140开机时停止。红外控制设备120可以将机顶盒140开机时所使用的红外发射器确定为主红外发射器。在确定出主红外发射器之后,若红外控制设备120可以只通过该主红外发射器发送红外控制信号,即可实现对机顶盒140的控制,节省了红外控制设备120的功耗。In a possible implementation manner, when the TV 110 is turned on, the infrared control device 120 may receive the power-on infrared code sent by the TV 110. The infrared control device 120 can modulate the start-up infrared control signal according to the start-up infrared code, and send the start-up infrared control signal through different infrared transmitters in turn, until the set-top box 140 stops when the set-top box 140 is started. The infrared control device 120 may determine the infrared transmitter used when the set-top box 140 is turned on as the main infrared transmitter. After the main infrared transmitter is determined, if the infrared control device 120 can only send infrared control signals through the main infrared transmitter, the set-top box 140 can be controlled and the power consumption of the infrared control device 120 can be saved.
示例性的,如图9所示,红外控制设备120上可以包括有8个红外发射器,例如红外发射器124A,红外发射器124B,红外发射器124C,红外发射器124D,红外发射器124E,红外发射器124F,红外发射器124G,红外发射器124H。红外控制设备120在接收到电视机110发送的开机指令对应的红外码时,可以根据该开机指令对应的红外码,调制出用于开机的红外控制信号。红外控制设备120可以先通过红外发射器124A发送该用于开机的红外控制信号。Exemplarily, as shown in FIG. 9, the infrared control device 120 may include 8 infrared transmitters, such as infrared transmitter 124A, infrared transmitter 124B, infrared transmitter 124C, infrared transmitter 124D, and infrared transmitter 124E. Infrared transmitter 124F, infrared transmitter 124G, infrared transmitter 124H. When the infrared control device 120 receives the infrared code corresponding to the power-on instruction sent by the television 110, it can modulate the infrared control signal for power-on according to the infrared code corresponding to the power-on instruction. The infrared control device 120 may first send the infrared control signal for booting through the infrared transmitter 124A.
1、若机顶盒140处于红外发射器124A的信号辐射范围内,机顶盒140可以接收到该用于开机的红外控制信号。响应于该用于开机的红外控制信号,机顶盒140开机,并通过HDMI线或AV线发送输出高电平信号给电视机110。电视机110在检测到HDMI线或AV线上的高电平信号后,可以返回控制完成指令给红外控制设备120。红外控制设备120在接收到控制完成指令后,将红外发射器124A确定为主红外发射器。1. If the set-top box 140 is within the signal radiation range of the infrared transmitter 124A, the set-top box 140 can receive the infrared control signal for booting. In response to the infrared control signal for booting, the set-top box 140 is turned on, and sends and outputs a high-level signal to the television 110 through the HDMI line or the AV line. After the television 110 detects the high-level signal on the HDMI line or the AV line, it may return the control completion instruction to the infrared control device 120. After the infrared control device 120 receives the control completion instruction, it determines the infrared transmitter 124A as the master infrared transmitter.
2、若机顶盒140不处于红外发射器124A的信号辐射范围内,机顶盒140无法接收到该用于开机的红外控制信号。电视机110在未检测到HDMI线或AV线上的高电平信号时,不发送完成指令给红外控制设备120。红外控制设备120在一段时间(例如1秒内)未接收到电视机110发送的完成指令时,可以换一个红外发射器(例如红外发射器124B)再次发送上述用于开机的红外控制信号,直至接收到电视机110发送的完成指令,确定出主红 外发射器。2. If the set-top box 140 is not within the signal radiation range of the infrared transmitter 124A, the set-top box 140 cannot receive the infrared control signal for booting. The television 110 does not send a completion instruction to the infrared control device 120 when it does not detect a high-level signal on the HDMI line or the AV line. When the infrared control device 120 does not receive the completion instruction sent by the television 110 within a period of time (for example, within 1 second), it can change to an infrared transmitter (for example, infrared transmitter 124B) to send the above infrared control signal for booting again until The completion instruction sent by the television 110 is received, and the main infrared transmitter is determined.
在红外控制设备120确定出主红外发射器之后,红外控制设备120可以通过主红外发射器发送红外控制信号,以实现对机顶盒140的控制。这样,节省了红外控制设备120的功耗。After the infrared control device 120 determines the main infrared transmitter, the infrared control device 120 may send an infrared control signal through the main infrared transmitter to control the set-top box 140. In this way, the power consumption of the infrared control device 120 is saved.
其中,在红外控制设备120确定出主红外发射器之后,若红外控制设备120发送红外控制信号,机顶盒140未作出响应,电视机110可以反馈该机顶盒140未响应的指示信息给红外控制设备120。红外控制设备120在接收到该机顶盒140未响应的指示信息后,可以按照前文中的方式重新确定出新的主红外发射器。Wherein, after the infrared control device 120 determines the main infrared transmitter, if the infrared control device 120 sends an infrared control signal and the set-top box 140 does not respond, the television 110 may feed back the instruction information that the set-top box 140 has not responded to the infrared control device 120. After the infrared control device 120 receives the indication that the set-top box 140 is not responding, it can re-determine the new main infrared transmitter in the manner described above.
在一些应用场景中,室内中可以有多个支持红外遥控的设备(例如机顶盒140、空调170和洗衣机180,等等)。用户可以通过遥控器130在电视机110上同时遥控多个设备(例如机顶盒140、空调170和洗衣机180,等等)。电视机110上可以存储有该多个设备各自对应的红外码库。电视机110可以通过遥控器130接收到用户针对指定设备(例如空调170)的控制指令,并从该指定设备对应的红外码库中,确定出将该控制指令对应的红外码。然后,电视机110可以将该控制指令对应的红外码,发送给红外控制设备120。红外控制设备120通过该红外码,调制出对应的红外控制信号向外发送。该指定设备(例如空调170)在接收该红外控制信号后,可以执行该红外控制信号对应的操作。这样,用户可以通过在电视机上通过一个遥控器就可以实现对多个设备的控制,给用户提供了便利。In some application scenarios, there may be multiple devices supporting infrared remote control in the room (for example, a set-top box 140, an air conditioner 170, a washing machine 180, etc.). The user can simultaneously remotely control multiple devices (such as the set-top box 140, the air conditioner 170, the washing machine 180, etc.) on the television 110 through the remote control 130. The television 110 may store respective infrared code libraries corresponding to the multiple devices. The television 110 may receive a user's control instruction for a designated device (for example, the air conditioner 170) through the remote control 130, and determine the infrared code corresponding to the control instruction from the infrared code library corresponding to the designated device. Then, the television 110 may send the infrared code corresponding to the control instruction to the infrared control device 120. The infrared control device 120 modulates the corresponding infrared control signal through the infrared code and sends it out. After the designated device (for example, the air conditioner 170) receives the infrared control signal, it can perform the operation corresponding to the infrared control signal. In this way, the user can control multiple devices through a remote control on the television, which provides convenience to the user.
示例性的,如图10A所示,红外控制设备120可以通过红外线遥控多个设备(例如机顶盒140、空调170和洗衣机180,等等)。电视机110可以显示有一个设备选择界面1010。其中,该设备选择界面1010中包括有多个设备选项(例如机顶盒选项1011、空调选项1012和洗衣机选项1013,等等)和选择框1014。Exemplarily, as shown in FIG. 10A, the infrared control device 120 can remotely control multiple devices (such as a set-top box 140, an air conditioner 170, a washing machine 180, etc.) through infrared rays. The television 110 may display a device selection interface 1010. Wherein, the device selection interface 1010 includes multiple device options (for example, a set-top box option 1011, an air conditioner option 1012, a washing machine option 1013, etc.) and a selection box 1014.
其中,当用户选择了机顶盒选项1011后,电视机110可以显示如上图4A所示的主页应用界面410。当用户选择了洗衣机选项1013后,电视机110可以显示该洗衣机180对应的洗衣机控制界面,用于控制洗衣机。Wherein, when the user selects the STB option 1011, the television 110 may display the homepage application interface 410 shown in FIG. 4A above. When the user selects the washing machine option 1013, the television 110 may display the washing machine control interface corresponding to the washing machine 180 for controlling the washing machine.
电视机110可以通过遥控器130接收用户的针对空调选项1012的选择输入,响应于该针对空调选项1012的选择输入,电视机110可以显示出如图10B所示的空调控制界面1020。The TV 110 may receive the user's selection input for the air conditioning option 1012 through the remote control 130. In response to the selection input for the air conditioning option 1012, the TV 110 may display an air conditioning control interface 1020 as shown in FIG. 10B.
如图10B所示,该空调控制界面1020可以包括有电源开关1021,工作模式1022(例如自动模式,制冷模式,制热模式,通风模式和除湿模式,等等),风速选项1023(例如自动风速选项、大风速选项、中风速选项、小风速选项,等等),其他选项1024(例如健康选项、强劲选项),设置温度控件1025和睡眠时间输入框1026,以及输入框1027等等。As shown in FIG. 10B, the air conditioning control interface 1020 may include a power switch 1021, a working mode 1022 (such as automatic mode, cooling mode, heating mode, ventilation mode and dehumidification mode, etc.), and a wind speed option 1023 (such as automatic wind speed). Options, high wind speed options, medium wind speed options, small wind speed options, etc.), other options 1024 (for example, healthy options, strong options), setting temperature control 1025, sleep time input box 1026, and input box 1027, etc.
当电视机110通过遥控器130接收到用户针对自动风速选项的选择输入(例如通过遥控器130上的方向键移动输入框1027至自动风速选项上,然后按下确认键133E)时,电视机110可以将该自动风速选项对应的红外码发送给红外控制设备120。红外控制设备120在接收到该自动风速选项对应的红外码后,可以根据该红外码调制出红外控制信号,通过红外发射器向外发送该红外控制信号。空调170在接收到该红外控制信号后,可以从该红外控制信号中解析出该自动风速选项对应的红外码,从而执行该红外码对应的控制指令,即将风速设置为自动风速。When the TV 110 receives the user's selection input for the automatic wind speed option through the remote control 130 (for example, the input box 1027 is moved to the automatic wind speed option through the direction keys on the remote control 130, and then the confirm key 133E is pressed), the TV 110 The infrared code corresponding to the automatic wind speed option may be sent to the infrared control device 120. After receiving the infrared code corresponding to the automatic wind speed option, the infrared control device 120 can modulate an infrared control signal according to the infrared code, and send the infrared control signal to the outside through an infrared transmitter. After receiving the infrared control signal, the air conditioner 170 can parse the infrared code corresponding to the automatic wind speed option from the infrared control signal, thereby executing the control command corresponding to the infrared code, that is, setting the wind speed to the automatic wind speed.
在本申请实施例中,支持接收红外线遥控的设备各自对应的红外码库也可以存储在红外控制设备120上,电视机110在通过遥控器130接收到用户针对指定设备(例如空调170)输入的控制操作后,可以将该控制操作对应的控制指令,发送给红外控制设备120。然后,红外控制设备120可以根据该控制指令,从该指定设备对应的红外码库中确定出该控制指令对应的红外码。接着,红外控制设备120可以根据该红外码调制出红外控制信号并向外辐射。该指定设备(例如空调170),在接收到该红外控制信号后,可以解析出控制指令,并执行该控制指令。In the embodiment of the present application, the respective infrared code libraries corresponding to the devices that support infrared remote control can also be stored on the infrared control device 120, and the television 110 receives the user input for the specified device (for example, the air conditioner 170) through the remote control 130. After the control operation, the control instruction corresponding to the control operation can be sent to the infrared control device 120. Then, the infrared control device 120 can determine the infrared code corresponding to the control instruction from the infrared code library corresponding to the designated device according to the control instruction. Then, the infrared control device 120 can modulate an infrared control signal according to the infrared code and radiate it outward. The designated device (for example, the air conditioner 170), after receiving the infrared control signal, can parse out the control instruction and execute the control instruction.
以上所述,以上实施例仅用以说明本申请的技术方案,而非对其限制;尽管参照前述实施例对本申请进行了详细的说明,本领域的普通技术人员应当理解:其依然可以对前述各实施例所记载的技术方案进行修改,或者对其中部分技术特征进行等同替换;而这些修改或者替换,并不使相应技术方案的本质脱离本申请各实施例技术方案的范围。As mentioned above, the above embodiments are only used to illustrate the technical solutions of the present application, not to limit them; although the present application has been described in detail with reference to the foregoing embodiments, a person of ordinary skill in the art should understand that: The technical solutions recorded in the embodiments are modified, or some of the technical features are equivalently replaced; these modifications or replacements do not cause the essence of the corresponding technical solutions to deviate from the scope of the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application.

Claims (24)

  1. 一种机顶盒的控制方法,其特征在于,包括:A method for controlling a set-top box is characterized by comprising:
    遥控器响应于用户针对第一频道的选择操作,向电视机发送第一控制指令;The remote controller sends a first control instruction to the television in response to the user's selection operation of the first channel;
    所述电视机在接收到所述第一控制指令后,向红外控制设备发送所述第一频道对应的第一红外码;After receiving the first control instruction, the television sends the first infrared code corresponding to the first channel to the infrared control device;
    所述红外控制设备在接收到所述第一红外码后,将所述第一红外码通过红外线发送给机顶盒;After receiving the first infrared code, the infrared control device sends the first infrared code to the set-top box via infrared;
    所述机顶盒在接收到所述第一红外码后,获取所述第一频道的视频数据,并将所述第一频道的视频数据发送所述电视机;After receiving the first infrared code, the set-top box acquires the video data of the first channel, and sends the video data of the first channel to the television;
    所述电视机播放所述第一频道的视频数据。The television plays the video data of the first channel.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述遥控器响应于用户针对第一频道的选择操作,向电视机发送第一控制指令之前,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein before the remote control sends the first control instruction to the television in response to the user's selection operation of the first channel, the method further comprises:
    当所述电视机与所述机顶盒同时处于待机状态时,所述遥控器响应于用户针对电视机的开机操作,向所述电视机发送第二控制指令,用于指示所述电视机和所述机顶盒切换至开机状态;When the television and the set-top box are in the standby state at the same time, the remote control sends a second control instruction to the television in response to the user's power-on operation of the television, for instructing the television and the The set-top box is switched to the on state;
    所述电视机在接收到所述第二控制指令后,切换至开机状态并向所述红外控制设备发送所述第二控制指令对应的第二红外码;After receiving the second control instruction, the television switches to a power-on state and sends a second infrared code corresponding to the second control instruction to the infrared control device;
    所述红外控制设备在接收所述第二红外码后,将所述第二红外码通过红外线发送给所述机顶盒;After receiving the second infrared code, the infrared control device sends the second infrared code to the set-top box via infrared;
    所述机顶盒在接收到所述第二红外码后,切换至开机状态。After receiving the second infrared code, the set-top box switches to a power-on state.
  3. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 1, wherein the method further comprises:
    当所述电视机与所述机顶盒同时处于开机状态时,所述遥控器响应于用户针对电视机的待机操作,向所述电视机发送第三控制指令,用于指示所述电视机和所述机顶盒切换至待机状态;When the television and the set-top box are in the on-state at the same time, the remote control sends a third control instruction to the television in response to the user's standby operation on the television, for instructing the television and the The set-top box switches to the standby state;
    所述电视机在接收到所述第三控制指令后,切换至待机状态并向所述红外控制设备发送所述第三控制指令对应的第三红外码;After receiving the third control instruction, the television switches to a standby state and sends a third infrared code corresponding to the third control instruction to the infrared control device;
    所述红外控制设备在接收所述第三红外码后,将所述第三红外码通过红外线发送给所述机顶盒;After receiving the third infrared code, the infrared control device sends the third infrared code to the set-top box via infrared;
    所述机顶盒在接收到所述第三红外码后,切换至待机状态。After receiving the third infrared code, the set-top box switches to a standby state.
  4. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 1, wherein the method further comprises:
    在所述电视机播放所述第一频道的视频数据时,所述遥控器响应于用户的切换至第二频道的操作,向所述电视机发送所述第四控制指令;When the television plays the video data of the first channel, the remote controller sends the fourth control instruction to the television in response to the user's operation of switching to the second channel;
    所述电视机在接收到所述第四控制指令后,确定所述第二频道的频道号对应的第四红外码,并向所述红外控制设备发送所述第四红外码;After receiving the fourth control instruction, the television determines the fourth infrared code corresponding to the channel number of the second channel, and sends the fourth infrared code to the infrared control device;
    所述红外控制设备在接收到所述第四红外码后,将所述第四红外码通过红外线发送给 所述机顶盒;After receiving the fourth infrared code, the infrared control device sends the fourth infrared code to the set-top box via infrared;
    所述机顶盒在接收到所述第四红外码后,获取第二频道的视频数据,并将所述第二频道的视频数据发送给所述电视机;After receiving the fourth infrared code, the set-top box obtains the video data of the second channel, and sends the video data of the second channel to the television;
    所述电视机播放所述第二频道的视频数据。The television plays the video data of the second channel.
  5. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 1, wherein the method further comprises:
    在所述电视机播放所述第一频道的视频数据时,所述遥控器响应于用户的切换至第二频道的操作,向所述电视机发送所述第四控制指令;When the television plays the video data of the first channel, the remote controller sends the fourth control instruction to the television in response to the user's operation of switching to the second channel;
    所述电视机在接收到所述第四控制指令后,向所述红外控制设备发送所述第四控制指令对应的第五红外码;After receiving the fourth control instruction, the television sends a fifth infrared code corresponding to the fourth control instruction to the infrared control device;
    所述红外控制设备在接收到所述第五红外码后,将所述第五红外码通过红外线发送给所述机顶盒;After receiving the fifth infrared code, the infrared control device sends the fifth infrared code to the set-top box via infrared;
    所述机顶盒在接收到所述第五红外码后,根据所述第五红外码和所述第一频道的频道号,确定出所述第二频道的频道号;After receiving the fifth infrared code, the set-top box determines the channel number of the second channel according to the fifth infrared code and the channel number of the first channel;
    所述机顶盒根据所述第二频道的频道号,获取所述第二频道的视频数据,并将所述第二频道的视频数据发送给所述电视机;The set-top box obtains the video data of the second channel according to the channel number of the second channel, and sends the video data of the second channel to the television;
    所述电视机播放所述第二频道的视频数据。The television plays the video data of the second channel.
  6. 一种机顶盒的控制方法,其特征在于,包括:A method for controlling a set-top box is characterized by comprising:
    遥控器响应于用户针对第一频道的选择操作,向电视机发送第一控制指令;The remote controller sends a first control instruction to the television in response to the user's selection operation of the first channel;
    所述电视机在接收到所述第一控制指令后,向红外控制设备发送所述第一频道对应的第一红外码;After receiving the first control instruction, the television sends the first infrared code corresponding to the first channel to the infrared control device;
    所述红外控制设备在接收所述第一红外码后,将所述第一红外码通过红外线发送给机顶盒;其中,所述第一红外码用于指示所述机顶盒获取第一频道的视频数据,并将所述第一频道的视频数据发送给所述电视机;After receiving the first infrared code, the infrared control device sends the first infrared code to the set-top box via infrared; wherein, the first infrared code is used to instruct the set-top box to obtain the video data of the first channel, And sending the video data of the first channel to the television;
    所述电视机播放所述第一频道的视频数据。The television plays the video data of the first channel.
  7. 根据权利要求6所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述遥控器响应于用户针对第一频道的选择操作,向电视机发送第一控制指令之前,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 6, characterized in that, before the remote control sends the first control instruction to the television in response to the user's selection operation of the first channel, the method further comprises:
    当所述电视机与所述机顶盒同时处于待机状态时,所述遥控器响应于用户针对所述电视机的开机操作,向所述电视机发送第二控制指令,用于指示所述电视机和所述机顶盒切换至开机状态;When the television and the set-top box are in the standby state at the same time, the remote controller sends a second control instruction to the television in response to the user's power-on operation of the television, for instructing the television and Switching the set-top box to a power-on state;
    所述电视机在接收到所述第二控制指令后,切换至开机状态并向所述红外控制设备发送所述第二控制指令对应的第二红外码;After receiving the second control instruction, the television switches to a power-on state and sends a second infrared code corresponding to the second control instruction to the infrared control device;
    所述红外控制设备在接收所述第二红外码后,将所述第二红外码通过红外线发送给所述机顶盒;其中,所述第二红外码用于指示所述机顶盒开机。After receiving the second infrared code, the infrared control device sends the second infrared code to the set-top box via infrared; wherein the second infrared code is used to instruct the set-top box to turn on.
  8. 根据权利要求6所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 6, wherein the method further comprises:
    当所述电视机与所述机顶盒同时处于开机状态时,所述遥控器响应于用户针对电视机的待机操作,向所述电视机发送第三控制指令,用于指示所述电视机和所述机顶盒切换至待机状态;When the television and the set-top box are in the power-on state at the same time, the remote control sends a third control instruction to the television in response to the user's standby operation on the television, for instructing the television and the The set-top box switches to the standby state;
    所述电视机在接收到所述第三控制指令后,切换至待机状态并向所述红外控制设备发送所述第三控制指令对应的第三红外码;After receiving the third control instruction, the television switches to a standby state and sends a third infrared code corresponding to the third control instruction to the infrared control device;
    所述红外控制设备在接收所述第三红外码后,将所述第三红外码通过红外线发送给所述机顶盒;其中,所述第三红外码用于指示所述机顶盒切换至待机状态。After receiving the third infrared code, the infrared control device sends the third infrared code to the set-top box via infrared; wherein the third infrared code is used to instruct the set-top box to switch to a standby state.
  9. 根据权利要求6所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 6, wherein the method further comprises:
    在所述电视机播放所述第一频道的视频数据时,所述遥控器响应于用户的切台至第二频道的操作,向所述电视机发送所述第四控制指令;When the TV is playing the video data of the first channel, the remote controller sends the fourth control instruction to the TV in response to the user's operation of switching to the second channel;
    所述电视机在接收到所述第四控制指令后,确定所述第二频道的频道号对应的第四红外码,并通过所述第二传输方式向所述红外控制设备发送所述第四红外码;After receiving the fourth control instruction, the television determines the fourth infrared code corresponding to the channel number of the second channel, and sends the fourth infrared code to the infrared control device through the second transmission mode. Infrared code
    所述红外控制设备在接收到所述第四红外码后,将所述第四红外码通过红外线发送给所述机顶盒;其中,所述第四红外码用于指示所述机顶盒获取第二频道的视频数据,并将所述第二频道的视频数据发送给所述电视机;After receiving the fourth infrared code, the infrared control device sends the fourth infrared code to the set-top box via infrared; wherein, the fourth infrared code is used to instruct the set-top box to obtain the second channel Video data, and sending the video data of the second channel to the television;
    所述电视机播放所述第二频道的视频数据。The television plays the video data of the second channel.
  10. 根据权利要求6所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 6, wherein the method further comprises:
    在所述电视机播放所述第一频道的视频数据时,所述遥控器响应于用户的切台至第二频道的操作,向所述电视机发送所述第四控制指令;When the TV is playing the video data of the first channel, the remote controller sends the fourth control instruction to the TV in response to the user's operation of switching to the second channel;
    所述电视机在接收到所述第四控制指令后,向所述红外控制设备发送所述第四控制指令对应的第五红外码;After receiving the fourth control instruction, the television sends a fifth infrared code corresponding to the fourth control instruction to the infrared control device;
    所述红外控制设备在接收到所述第五红外码后,将所述第五红外码通过红外线发送给所述机顶盒;其中,所述第五红外码用于指示所述机顶盒根据所述第五红外码和所述第一频道的频道号,确定出所述第二频道的频道号,并根据所述第二频道的频道号,获取所述第二频道的视频数据,并发送给所述电视机;After receiving the fifth infrared code, the infrared control device sends the fifth infrared code to the set-top box via infrared; wherein, the fifth infrared code is used to instruct the set-top box according to the fifth infrared code. The infrared code and the channel number of the first channel are used to determine the channel number of the second channel, and according to the channel number of the second channel, the video data of the second channel is obtained and sent to the TV machine;
    所述电视机播放所述第二频道的视频数据。The television plays the video data of the second channel.
  11. 一种机顶盒的控制方法,其特征在于,包括:A method for controlling a set-top box is characterized by comprising:
    电视机接收遥控器在响应于针对第一频道的选择操作时发送的第一控制指令;The television receives the first control instruction sent by the remote controller in response to the selection operation for the first channel;
    所述电视机向红外控制设备发送所述第一频道对应的第一红外码;Sending, by the television, the first infrared code corresponding to the first channel to an infrared control device;
    所述红外控制设备在接收到所述第一红外码后,将所述第一红外码通过红外线发送给机顶盒;其中,所述第一红外码用于指示所述机顶盒获取第一频道的视频数据,并将所述第一频道的视频数据发送至所述电视机上播放。After receiving the first infrared code, the infrared control device sends the first infrared code to the set-top box via infrared; wherein the first infrared code is used to instruct the set-top box to obtain the video data of the first channel , And send the video data of the first channel to the TV for playing.
  12. 一种系统,其特征在于,包括:遥控器、电视机、红外控制设备和机顶盒;其中:A system characterized by comprising: a remote control, a television, an infrared control device and a set-top box; wherein:
    所述遥控器,用于响应于用户针对第一频道的选择操作,向所述电视机发送第一控制 指令;The remote controller is configured to send a first control instruction to the television in response to a user's selection operation on the first channel;
    所述电视机,用于在接收到所述第一控制指令后,向所述红外控制设备发送所述第一频道对应的第一红外码;The television is configured to send the first infrared code corresponding to the first channel to the infrared control device after receiving the first control instruction;
    所述红外控制设备,用于在接收到所述第一红外码后,将所述第一红外码通过红外线发送给所述机顶盒;The infrared control device is configured to, after receiving the first infrared code, send the first infrared code to the set-top box via infrared;
    所述机顶盒,用于在接收到所述第一红外码后,获取所述第一频道的视频数据,并将所述第一频道的视频数据发送所述电视机;The set-top box is configured to obtain the video data of the first channel after receiving the first infrared code, and send the video data of the first channel to the television;
    所述电视机,用于播放所述第一频道的视频数据。The television is used for playing video data of the first channel.
  13. 根据权利要求12所述的系统,其特征在于,所述遥控器,还用于当所述电视机与机顶盒同时处于待机状态时,响应于用户针对所述电视机的开机操作,向电视机发送第二控制指令;其中,所述第二控制指令用于指示所述电视机和所述机顶盒切换至开机状态;The system according to claim 12, wherein the remote control is further configured to send to the TV in response to the user's power-on operation of the TV when the TV and the set-top box are in a standby state at the same time A second control instruction; wherein, the second control instruction is used to instruct the television and the set-top box to switch to the on state;
    所述电视机,还用于在接收到所述第二控制指令后,切换至开机状态并向所述红外控制设备发送所述第二控制指令对应的第二红外码;The television is further configured to switch to a power-on state after receiving the second control instruction and send a second infrared code corresponding to the second control instruction to the infrared control device;
    所述红外控制设备,还用于在接收到所述第二红外码后,将所述第二红外码通过红外线发送给所述机顶盒;The infrared control device is further configured to send the second infrared code to the set-top box via infrared after receiving the second infrared code;
    所述机顶盒,还用于在接收到所述第二红外码后,切换至开机状态。The set-top box is also used to switch to a power-on state after receiving the second infrared code.
  14. 根据权利要求12所述的系统,其特征在于,所述遥控器,还用于当所述电视机与所述机顶盒同时处于开机状态时,响应于用户针对所述电视机的待机操作,向电视机发送第三控制指令;其中,所述第三控制指令用于指示所述电视机和所述机顶盒切换至待机状态;The system according to claim 12, wherein the remote control is further used for when the television and the set-top box are in the on state at the same time, in response to the user's standby operation on the television, give the television a The computer sends a third control instruction; wherein the third control instruction is used to instruct the television and the set-top box to switch to a standby state;
    所述电视机,还用于在接收到所述第三控制指令后,切换至待机状态并向所述红外控制设备发送所述第三控制指令的第三红外码;The television is further configured to switch to a standby state after receiving the third control instruction and send the third infrared code of the third control instruction to the infrared control device;
    所述红外控制设备,还用于在接收到所述第三红外码后,将所述第三红外码通过红外线发送给所述机顶盒;The infrared control device is further configured to send the third infrared code to the set-top box via infrared after receiving the third infrared code;
    所述机顶盒,还用于在接收到所述第三红外码后,切换至待机状态。The set-top box is also used to switch to a standby state after receiving the third infrared code.
  15. 一种系统,其特征在于,包括:遥控器、电视机和红外控制设备;其中:A system, characterized in that it comprises: a remote control, a television and an infrared control device; wherein:
    所述遥控器,用于响应于用户针对第一频道的选择操作,向所述电视机发送第一控制指令;The remote controller is configured to send a first control instruction to the television in response to a user's selection operation on the first channel;
    所述电视机,用于在接收到所述第一控制指令后,向所述红外控制设备发送所述第一频道对应的第一红外码;The television is configured to send the first infrared code corresponding to the first channel to the infrared control device after receiving the first control instruction;
    所述红外控制设备,用于在接收到所述第一红外码后,将所述第一红外码通过红外线发送给机顶盒;所述第一红外码用于指示所述机顶盒获取所述第一频道的视频数据,并将所述第一频道的视频数据发送给所述电视机;The infrared control device is configured to send the first infrared code to a set-top box via infrared after receiving the first infrared code; the first infrared code is used to instruct the set-top box to obtain the first channel And send the video data of the first channel to the television;
    所述电视机,用于播放所述第一频道的视频数据。The television is used for playing video data of the first channel.
  16. 根据权利要求15所述的系统,其特征在于,所述遥控器,还用于当所述电视机与机顶盒同时处于待机状态时,响应于用户针对所述电视机的开机操作,向电视机发送第二控制指令;其中,所述第二控制指令用于指示所述电视机和所述机顶盒切换至开机状态;The system according to claim 15, wherein the remote control is further configured to send to the TV in response to the user's power-on operation of the TV when the TV and the set-top box are in a standby state at the same time A second control instruction; wherein, the second control instruction is used to instruct the television and the set-top box to switch to the on state;
    所述电视机,还用于在接收到所述第二控制指令后,切换至开机状态并向所述红外控制设备发送所述第二控制指令对应的第二红外码;The television is further configured to switch to a power-on state after receiving the second control instruction and send a second infrared code corresponding to the second control instruction to the infrared control device;
    所述红外控制设备,还用于在接收到所述第二红外码后,将所述第二红外码通过红外线发送给所述机顶盒;其中,所述第二红外码用于指示所述机顶盒切换至待机状态。The infrared control device is further configured to send the second infrared code to the set-top box via infrared after receiving the second infrared code; wherein, the second infrared code is used to instruct the set-top box to switch To the standby state.
  17. 根据权利要求15所述的系统,其特征在于,所述遥控器,还用于当所述电视机与所述机顶盒同时处于开机状态时,响应于用户针对所述电视机的待机操作,向电视机发送第三控制指令;其中,所述第三控制指令用于指示所述电视机和所述机顶盒切换至待机状态;The system according to claim 15, wherein the remote control is further used for when the TV and the set-top box are in the on state at the same time, in response to the user’s standby operation on the TV, The computer sends a third control instruction; wherein the third control instruction is used to instruct the television and the set-top box to switch to a standby state;
    所述电视机,还用于在接收到所述第三控制指令后,切换至待机状态并向所述红外控制设备发送所述第三控制指令的第三红外码;The television is further configured to switch to a standby state after receiving the third control instruction and send the third infrared code of the third control instruction to the infrared control device;
    所述红外控制设备,还用于在接收到所述第三红外码后,将所述第三红外码通过红外线发送给所述机顶盒;其中,所述第三红外码用于指示所述机顶盒切换至待机状态。The infrared control device is further configured to, after receiving the third infrared code, send the third infrared code to the set-top box via infrared; wherein the third infrared code is used to instruct the set-top box to switch To the standby state.
  18. 一种机顶盒的控制方法,其特征在于,包括:A method for controlling a set-top box is characterized by comprising:
    电视机接收用户选择第一频道的第一控制指令;The television receives the first control instruction for the user to select the first channel;
    响应于所述第一控制指令,所述电视机发送所述第一频道对应的第一红外码;其中,所述第一红外码用于指示所述机顶盒获取所述第一频道的视频数据;In response to the first control instruction, the television sends a first infrared code corresponding to the first channel; wherein the first infrared code is used to instruct the set-top box to obtain video data of the first channel;
    所述电视机从所述机顶盒获取所述第一频道的视频数据,并播放所述第一频道的视频数据。The television obtains the video data of the first channel from the set-top box, and plays the video data of the first channel.
  19. 根据权利要求18所述的方法,其特征在于,在电视机接收用户选择第一频道的第一控制指令之前,所述方法包括:The method according to claim 18, wherein before the television receives the first control instruction for the user to select the first channel, the method comprises:
    当所述电视机与所述机顶盒同时处于待机状态时,所述电视机接收到第二控制指令;所述第二控制指令用于指示所述电视机和所述机顶盒切换至开机状态;When the television and the set-top box are in a standby state at the same time, the television receives a second control instruction; the second control instruction is used to instruct the television and the set-top box to switch to a power-on state;
    响应于所述第二控制指令,所述电视机切换至开机状态,并发送所述第二控制指令对应的第二红外码;所述第二红外码用于指示所述机顶盒切换至开机状态。In response to the second control instruction, the television is switched to the on state and sends a second infrared code corresponding to the second control instruction; the second infrared code is used to instruct the set-top box to switch to the on state.
  20. 根据权利要求18所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 18, wherein the method further comprises:
    当所述电视机与所述机顶盒同时处于开机状态时,所述电视机接收第三控制指令;所述第三控制指令用于指示所述电视机和所述机顶盒切换至待机状态;When the television and the set-top box are in a power-on state at the same time, the television receives a third control instruction; the third control instruction is used to instruct the television and the set-top box to switch to a standby state;
    响应于所述第三控制指令,所述电视机切换至待机状态并发送所述第三控制指令对应的第三红外码;所述第三红外码用于指示所述机顶盒切换至待机状态。In response to the third control instruction, the television set switches to a standby state and sends a third infrared code corresponding to the third control instruction; the third infrared code is used to instruct the set-top box to switch to the standby state.
  21. 根据权利要求18所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 18, wherein the method further comprises:
    在所述电视机播放所述第一频道的视频数据时,所述电视机接收第四控制指令;所述第四控制指令用于指示所述电视机切台至第二频道;When the television plays the video data of the first channel, the television receives a fourth control instruction; the fourth control instruction is used to instruct the television to switch to the second channel;
    响应于所述第四控制指令,所述电视机确定出所述第二频道的频道号对应的第四红外码,并发送第四红外码;其中,所述第四红外码用于指示所述机顶盒获取第二频道的视频数据;In response to the fourth control instruction, the television determines the fourth infrared code corresponding to the channel number of the second channel, and sends a fourth infrared code; wherein, the fourth infrared code is used to indicate the The set-top box obtains the video data of the second channel;
    所述电视机从所述机顶盒获取所述第二频道的视频数据,并播放所述第二频道的视频数据。The television obtains the video data of the second channel from the set-top box, and plays the video data of the second channel.
  22. 根据权利要求18所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 18, wherein the method further comprises:
    在所述电视机播放所述第一频道的视频数据时,所述电视机接收第四控制指令;所述第四控制指令用于指示所述电视机切台至第二频道;When the television plays the video data of the first channel, the television receives a fourth control instruction; the fourth control instruction is used to instruct the television to switch to the second channel;
    响应于所述第四控制指令,所述电视机发送所述第四控制指令对应的第五红外码;其中,所述第五红外码用于指示所述机顶盒根据所述第五红外码和所述第一频道的频道号,确定出所述第二频道的频道号,并根据所述第二频道的频道号,获取所述第二频道的视频数据;In response to the fourth control instruction, the television sends a fifth infrared code corresponding to the fourth control instruction; wherein, the fifth infrared code is used to instruct the set-top box according to the fifth infrared code and the The channel number of the first channel, the channel number of the second channel is determined, and the video data of the second channel is obtained according to the channel number of the second channel;
    所述电视机从所述机顶盒获取所述第二频道的视频数据,并播放所述第二频道的视频数据。The television obtains the video data of the second channel from the set-top box, and plays the video data of the second channel.
  23. 一种电视机,其特征在于,包括:显示屏、通信模块、一个或多个处理器和一个或多个存储器;一个或多个存储器与一个或多个处理器耦合,一个或多个存储器用于存储计算机程序代码,所述计算机程序代码包括计算机指令,当一个或多个处理器执行所述计算机指令时,使得所述电视机执行上述权利要求18-22中任一项所述的方法。A television, characterized by comprising: a display screen, a communication module, one or more processors and one or more memories; one or more memories are coupled with one or more processors, and one or more memories are used for In storing computer program code, the computer program code includes computer instructions, which when one or more processors execute the computer instructions, cause the television to execute the method according to any one of claims 18-22.
  24. 一种计算机存储介质,其特征在于,包括计算机指令,当所述计算机指令在电视机上运行时,使得所述电视机执行上述权利要求18-22中任一项所述的方法。A computer storage medium, characterized by comprising computer instructions, which when the computer instructions run on a television, causes the television to execute the method according to any one of claims 18-22.
PCT/CN2020/098280 2019-06-27 2020-06-24 Control method for set top box, system, and related device WO2020259632A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201910570554.8 2019-06-27
CN201910570554.8A CN110248231B (en) 2019-06-27 2019-06-27 Control method, system and related device of set top box

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2020259632A1 true WO2020259632A1 (en) 2020-12-30

Family

ID=67889931

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2020/098280 WO2020259632A1 (en) 2019-06-27 2020-06-24 Control method for set top box, system, and related device

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (2) CN112423058B (en)
WO (1) WO2020259632A1 (en)

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN112752126A (en) * 2020-12-31 2021-05-04 深圳Tcl数字技术有限公司 Control method and control system of set top box and computer readable storage medium
CN114286186A (en) * 2021-07-14 2022-04-05 海信视像科技股份有限公司 Control device and linkage control method for simultaneously turning on and turning off multiple devices

Families Citing this family (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN112423058B (en) * 2019-06-27 2022-01-14 华为技术有限公司 Control method and system of set top box and related device
CN111127870B (en) * 2019-12-30 2021-09-21 深圳小佳科技有限公司 Remote control method, remote controller, remote control system and storage medium
CN113115084A (en) * 2020-01-13 2021-07-13 百度在线网络技术(北京)有限公司 Method, device and equipment for controlling television channels and storage medium
CN112153377B (en) * 2020-09-27 2022-09-06 山东浪潮超高清视频产业有限公司 Live television channel change automatic test system and method based on image recognition technology

Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20090245803A1 (en) * 2008-03-31 2009-10-01 Universal Electronics Inc. System and method for reduction of infrared noise during communication between consumer appliances
CN103442279A (en) * 2013-08-02 2013-12-11 四川长虹电器股份有限公司 Interaction system and method based on set top box and smart television
CN103634633A (en) * 2012-08-23 2014-03-12 Lg电子株式会社 Multimedia device connected to external electronic device and method for controlling the same
CN106210833A (en) * 2016-07-13 2016-12-07 乐视控股(北京)有限公司 The method and system of switching channels, intelligent terminal and controller
CN206728212U (en) * 2017-05-18 2017-12-08 成都住视网络技术有限公司 A kind of control device based on set top box
CN110248231A (en) * 2019-06-27 2019-09-17 华为技术有限公司 A kind of control method of set-top box, system and relevant apparatus

Family Cites Families (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US9086720B1 (en) * 2012-09-10 2015-07-21 Amazon Technologies, Inc. Device remote control
CN105245931B (en) * 2015-09-30 2019-01-22 北京酷云互动科技有限公司 A kind of remote control method and remote control system of set-top box

Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20090245803A1 (en) * 2008-03-31 2009-10-01 Universal Electronics Inc. System and method for reduction of infrared noise during communication between consumer appliances
CN103634633A (en) * 2012-08-23 2014-03-12 Lg电子株式会社 Multimedia device connected to external electronic device and method for controlling the same
CN103442279A (en) * 2013-08-02 2013-12-11 四川长虹电器股份有限公司 Interaction system and method based on set top box and smart television
CN106210833A (en) * 2016-07-13 2016-12-07 乐视控股(北京)有限公司 The method and system of switching channels, intelligent terminal and controller
CN206728212U (en) * 2017-05-18 2017-12-08 成都住视网络技术有限公司 A kind of control device based on set top box
CN110248231A (en) * 2019-06-27 2019-09-17 华为技术有限公司 A kind of control method of set-top box, system and relevant apparatus

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN112752126A (en) * 2020-12-31 2021-05-04 深圳Tcl数字技术有限公司 Control method and control system of set top box and computer readable storage medium
CN114286186A (en) * 2021-07-14 2022-04-05 海信视像科技股份有限公司 Control device and linkage control method for simultaneously turning on and turning off multiple devices

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN112423058A (en) 2021-02-26
CN112423058B (en) 2022-01-14
CN110248231A (en) 2019-09-17
CN110248231B (en) 2023-09-08

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2020259632A1 (en) Control method for set top box, system, and related device
KR101917126B1 (en) Apparatus and method for displaying contents in home network system
US11856322B2 (en) Display apparatus for image processing and image processing method
US10453331B2 (en) Device control method and apparatus
US10362259B2 (en) Portable device, display apparatus, display system, and method for controlling power of display apparatus thereof
CN102662380B (en) Concentrative networking control method and system for family electric appliances
WO2017152605A1 (en) Method for controlling television set-top box, television, remote controller and television system
US20110129196A1 (en) Display control apparatus, display control system, and remote control apparatus
US11133867B2 (en) Image display device and operation method thereof
EP3013063B1 (en) Closed caption-support content receiving apparatus and display apparatus, system having the same, and closed caption-providing method thereof
CN110491387B (en) Interactive service implementation method and system based on multiple terminals
CN102802031A (en) Interactive system and method in allusion to television programs
US11907616B2 (en) Electronic apparatus, display apparatus and method of controlling the same
CN111932850A (en) AI voice remote controller and control method thereof
CN103327387A (en) Television remote control method and system
CN101621610B (en) Television controlling camera
CN112333504B (en) Intelligent device control method, remote control device and readable storage medium
CN105744320A (en) Television advertisement automatic switching system based on intelligent mobile phone
CN112040292A (en) Control method of display device, and storage medium
CN104602093A (en) Method for controlling multimedia device to generate picture data and control module
CN105809917A (en) Method and device for transmitting messages of internet of things
JP6302062B2 (en) Electronic apparatus, method and program
CN203968293U (en) A kind of pushing equipment of TV programme related information
CN111210819B (en) Information processing method and device and electronic equipment
WO2023284562A1 (en) Control device, household appliance, and control method

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20831349

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 20831349

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1